Montag, 28. Januar 2013

Rotbohne gefällt mir sehr.

Rotbohne gefällt mir sehr.

Shopping.

Shopping.

Es ist die Liebe!!

Es ist die Liebe!!

Practicetest HP2-K24 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-K24 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-K24 Selling HP SMB Storage our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
What is the benefit to your customer of the HP warranty included with the product?

A. A warranty guarantees that faulty items will be repaired within eight working hours.
B. A warranty protects the customer by minimizing the impact of a failure on the business.
C. A warranty ensures that faulty equipment will be back in service as quickly as the business requires.
D. A warranty provides protection against manufacturers’ defects in the product.

Answer: D

Explanation: Warranty service has limitations. Some of those limitations include the following:
*Warranty terms and conditions provide repair or replacement (at the discretion of HP) for defects in the manufacturer's material or workmanship. The warranty does not protect against accidental damage, loss, acts of nature, or any other event that did not originate during the manufacture of the product.
Reference:HP Products - Supplemental Information to Warranty Statements for HP Products
http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp?lang=en&cc=us&taskId=125&prodSeriesId=428936&prodTypeId=15351&objectID=c00383139(topic: Warranty Conditions, first bulleted point)


QUESTION NO: 2
A customer of an HP Channel Partner wants a Statement-of-Work engagement with HP, but wants the partner to remain in control of the account. Which service should be used for this situation?

A. HP Custom Services Contract
B. HP Unit of Service
C. HP Assessment Service
D. HP Deployment and Implementation Service

Answer: B

QUESTION NO: 3
You are discussing a possible server deal with your customer. How can you add about 20% to the revenues for the deal, and potentially 30% to the margin?

A. offer a free Proof of Concept
B. reduce the hardware discount by 10%
C. sell HP Care Packs
D. sell HP Warranty Services

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-K24 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-K23 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-K23 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-K23 Selling HP storage solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Which factors are important in developing a financial justification for replacing an existing tape backup system with a data deduplication solution? (Select three)

A. reduced labor costs
B. reduced capital expenditures on storage
C. storage savings resulting from tiered approach
D. staff savings on Grid storage approach
E. cost avoidance on tape media
F. efficiency gains from consolidated encryption technology

Answer: A,B,E



QUESTION NO: 2
What are the key characteristics of the HP 3PAR value proposition? (Select three)
A. Multi-Tenant
B. Converged
C. Thin
D. Efficient
E. Autonomic
F. Adaptive

Answer: A,D,E



QUESTION NO: 3
In what way does "Autonomic" storage deliver value to customers that deploy a 3PAR solution?

A. It provides thin provisioning
B. It enables massive consolidation
C. It allows balanced multi-tenancy.
D. It enables organizations to dynamically react to change

Answer: D

Practicetest HP2-K23 HP it-exams

E20-670 SABE301 642-681

E20-670 SABE301 642-681  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamE20-670 SABE301 642-681  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers E20-670 SABE301 642-681 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests E20-670 SABE301 642-681  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification E20-670 SABE301 642-681  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-H24 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-H24 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-H24 Technical Essentials of HP Workstations Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
In addition to speed, what is key feature of DDR3 memory offered in the HP Z620 Workstation compared to DDR2 memory?

A. You can support more memory in the same space.
B. DDR3 features ECC capabilities that are not available in DDR2.
C. DDR3 memory consumes more power thanDDR2.
D. DDR3 memory consumes less power thanDDR2.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
The HP Z620 Workstation provides visually cable-less engineering. Which customer benefit does this provide?

A. Supports hot component swap
B. Increases storage capacity
C. Reduces acoustic noise

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which customer requirement indicates the need for an HP Z820 Workstation rather than an HP Z620 Workstation?

A. Storage of medical images
B. Creation of large financial documents
C. Production of high-end 3D animation movies
D. Large project management applications

Answer: B

Practicetest HP2-H24 HP it-exams

A00-281 650-195 9L0-964

A00-281 650-195 9L0-964  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamA00-281 650-195 9L0-964  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers A00-281 650-195 9L0-964 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests A00-281 650-195 9L0-964  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification A00-281 650-195 9L0-964  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-H08 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-H08 HP it-exams

HP2-H08 Servicing HP Desktops , Workstations, and Notebooks our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions


QUESTION NO: 1
After installing new software, a customer reports an operating system failure that results in random blue screens.
What is the first option you should recommend for this customer?
A. Restore the operating system from the operating system CD/DVD.
B. Replace the hard drive.
C. Use Microsoft System Restore to return to a previous known working state.
D. Repair the operating system using the operating system CD/DVD.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Which benefit does HP DriveGuard add to a notebook?
A. It protects the hard drive from moisture damage.
B. It detects sudden motion and temporarily stops the hard drive.
C. It enhances Windows Aero security performance.
D. It encrypts the hard drive data and password-protects it.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which HP product for post-warranty support is available to HP customers?
A. Help Pack Services
B. Care Pack Services
C. Assistant Services
D. Service Pack Option

Answer: B

Practicetest HP2-H08 HP it-exams

HP2-H23 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-H23 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-H23 Sales Essentials of HP Workstations Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Why should a customer purchase an HP Performance Display with an HP workstation?

A. HP Performance Displays offer a low-cost solution and27-inchscreens.
B. Only HP Performance Displays can be used in multi-screen configurations.
C. HP Performance Displays feature super-glossy panels with native HDMI resolution.
D. HP Performance Displays are ergonomically designed, provide better image quality, and are tested with professional graphics cards.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
Which HP offering is capable of helping customers support multiple displays that support graphics applications?

A. USB ports on displays that allow customers to daisy chain displays
B. The HP LCD Quick Release that is compatible with most models
C. USB Graphics Adapter that supports up tosevendisplays running different applications
D. Multiple display interfaces that enable customers to ghost applications


Answer: C
Reference:http://www.slipperybrick.com/2009/08/sporting-seven-displays-with-hps-usb-graphicsadapter/


QUESTION NO: 3
What would be a good response to your customer’s objection of “I think we should just use highend PCs for our Autodesk Inventor users, they cost a lot less than workstations”?

A. Our workstations come with ECC memory to help improve performance.
B. Workstations give you more configuration options than desktop PCs.
C. Professional applications are certified on HP Workstations.
D. You will be able to support up to four monitors on an HP Workstation.

Answer: A

Practicetest HP2-H23 HP it-exams

HP2-H19 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-H19 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-H19 Servicing HP Client Virtualization Solutions - Sales our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Which person within the customer organization has the greatest influence and the greatest impact on your chances to win the sale?

A. executive director
B. power broker
C. chief information officer
D. chief financial officer

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
When competing against Wyse Thin Clients with ThinOS, what can you point out that would raise customer concerns?

A. The ThinOS operating system has a large footprint with heavy resource overhead.
B. Wyse ThinOS clients take longer to boot than HP Thin Clients.
C. Thin OS customizations go through the Wyse.ini config file using proprietary syntax.
D. Wyse ThinOS clients do not support a stateless architecture.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which competitive differentiator should you stress when competing against Igel?

A. HP's vertical market focus
B. Igel weakness in the Channel
C. weak management solution
D. offer of customized OS

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-H19 HP it-exams

1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02

1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 1D0-460 9A0-128 1Y0-A02  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E53 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E53 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E53 Selling HP Enterprise Solutions Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
What is likely to happen if you start negotiating process with a customer before they have conditionally agreed to the sale?

A. You will concede ground, and the customer will have a better starting point.
B. You will not be able to aim high enough.
C. You will lose ground to the competition.
D. You will end up fighting with the customer on price.

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
On the SCOTSMAN qualification checklist, the "A" stands for Authority. Which question would best help you qualify this area on the checklist?

A. What role will finance have in this decision?
B. What process will you go through to arrive at a decision?
C. In what period of time do you need to make the decision?
D. To what extent will purchasing have the final say in this decision?

Answer: D


QUESTION 3
Your customer is reaching power capacity limits for their data center. Which factor can you use to identify a way of resolving the problem almost immediately?

A. On average, data centers provision 60% more power than used.
B. On average, data centers provision 70% more network than used.
C. On average, data centers provision 70% more storage than used.
D. On average, data centers provision 85% more server capacity than used.

Answer: A

Practicetest HP2-E53 HP it-exams

1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914

1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 1Z0-531 642-978 LOT-914  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E52 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E52 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E52 Selling HP Cloudsystem and Converged Infrastructure Solutions Delta Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
HP's project Odyssey is intended to redefine the future of mission-critical computing with a
development roadmap that will unify UNIX and x86 server architectures.
What is a key benefit of this new project?

A. It will bring industry-leading availability, increased performance, and uncompromising client choice to a single platform.
B. It will enable customers to consolidate and virtualize all applications into one streamlined operating environment.
C. It will enable customers to run Windows and Linux applications and databases on Intel Itaniumbased blades.
D. It will bring the industry-leading HP-UXvirtualizationenvironment ontox86server architecture.

Answer: A

Reference:http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/newsroom/press/2011/111122xb.html


QUESTION NO: 2
Your customer wants to implement a mission critical Private Cloud solution with HP-UX 11 i v3 and be confident that their environment will be supported and be able to evolve into the next decade. Which HP solution would best address these needs?

A. HP BladeSystem
B. CloudSystem Matrix with HP-UX
C. HPX9000
D. HP Converged Infrastructure

Answer: B



QUESTION NO: 3
What enables customers to grow storage performance and capacity seamlessly?

A. Converged Storage Management
B. Scale-up Storage
C. SAS MDL Disks
D. Federated Scale-out Software

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-E52 HP it-exams

ST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818

ST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers ST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests ST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification ST0-29B S10-300 MB6-818  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E51 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E51 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E51 Selling HP Cloudsystem and Converged Infrastructure Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
New storage requirements are being driven by major shifts in the marketplace. What are two of these shifts? (Select two.)

A. the need to provision storage rapidly
B. the need for infrastructure management tools
C. the shift toward decentralized management by non-IT resources
D. the increasing reliance on in-house data centers
E. the need to support diverse and unpredictable workloads

Answer: A,E


QUESTION NO: 2
Which technology shifts are driving new storage requirements? (Select two.)

A. agility
B. serviceability
C. predictability
D. efficiency
E. complexity

Answer: D,E


QUESTION NO: 3
How does HP simplify networks for customer environments?

A. HP virtualizes, collocates, and flattens the networks.
B. HP virtualizes, converges, and flattens the networks.
C. HP virtualizes, converges, and operates the networks.
D. HP virtualizes, converges, and expands the networks.

Answer: B

Practicetest HP2-E51 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E50 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E50 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E50 Consultative Selling of HP Mission Critical Technical Services our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Besides a traditional solution, which type of solution do FlexFabric networks allow customers to adopt?
A. HP BladeSystem-integrated server edge
B. HP storage-integrated server edge
C. HP wireless LAN-integrated server edge
D. HP security-integrated server edge

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
HP switches make use of an HP-developed technology to enable the creation of a resilient virtual switching fabric. What is the name of this technology?
A. Intelligent Resilient Framework (IRF)
B. Intelligent Reference Framework (IRF)
C. Intelligent Reliable Fabric (IRF)
D. Intelligent Recovery Framework (IRF)

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
The requirement for Layer 2 extension between data centers is driven by the customer's desire to extend various clustering applications (and other high availability technologies between multiple DCs), support VMotion between data centers, and limit downtime during data center migration and consolidation activities. Which HP solution can meet these requirements?
A. HP Intelligent Management Center (IMC)
B. HP Virtual Connect
C. HP Intelligent Resilient Framework (IRF)
D. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-E50 HP it-exams

000-513 E20-540 E20-018

000-513 E20-540 E20-018  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team000-513 E20-540 E20-018  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 000-513 E20-540 E20-018 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 000-513 E20-540 E20-018  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 000-513 E20-540 E20-018  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

COG-400 CGEIT 70-241

COG-400 CGEIT 70-241  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamCOG-400 CGEIT 70-241  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers COG-400 CGEIT 70-241 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests COG-400 CGEIT 70-241  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification COG-400 CGEIT 70-241  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E49 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E49 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E49 Technical Essentials of HP Servers, Storage and Networking - Upgrade our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Which is a feature of HP Data Protector Express?

A. D2Any2Any automated copy and parallel data streams
B. fast backups and Virtual Tape Libraries
C. dynamically shared libraries and database redundancy
D. upgradability to Data Protector and data deduplication

Answer: A

Reference:http://h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/13732_div/13732_div.PDF(first page,third paragraph)


QUESTION NO: 2
Which technology is used by servers to connect to NAS devices?

A. Ethernet
B. USB
C. Fibre Channel
D. host bus adapter

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Which statement is true about distributed virtual RAID7?

A. It is possible to determine on which physical disk user data resides
B. Load balancing is required of the application and databases over available back-end (SCSI)buses
C. Performance is limited by the number of disk drives in the storage set.
D. l/Os are balanced across the disk group

Answer: D

Practicetest HP2-E49 HP it-exams

A00-250 9L0-313 650-082

A00-250 9L0-313 650-082  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamA00-250 9L0-313 650-082  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers A00-250 9L0-313 650-082 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests A00-250 9L0-313 650-082  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification A00-250 9L0-313 650-082  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E47 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E47 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E47 Selling HP Value Support Services our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
How would you respond to a customer who says that they need an on-site presence for hardware issues from HP to provide support?

A. HP will provide a permanent presence at the customer site.
B. HP has the most robust and complete standard services offering.
C. HP will guarantee repairs within 4 hours of the initial call to HP.
D. HP will offer a fully outsourced solution.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which support package should you recommend first to a customer who requires support for their HP 9000 disk array?

A. 3-Year Critical Advantage Level 3 Service
B. 3-Year Proactive 24
C. 3-Year HP Critical Service
D. 3-Year Support Plus 24

Answer: C

Reference:http://h18000.www1.hp.com/products/quickspecs/13725_div/13725_div.pdf(page 53)


QUESTION NO: 3
What is the purpose of HP Storage Services Sales Plays? (Select two.)

A. They help recommend the most appropriate solutions.
B. They create a Statement of Work (SOW) for storage services.
C. They define the storage networking needs of the customer.
D. They lead the discussion on storage services.
E. They develop the price to the customer.

Answer: A,D

Practicetest HP2-E47 HP it-exams

C_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450

C_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamC_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers C_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests C_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification C_TFIN22_64 650-987 70-450  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E46 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E46 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E46 Selling HP Volume Support Services our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
How would you define the new IT infrastructures that are being built using x86 servers and HP Technology Services?

A. the distributed infrastructure
B. the converged infrastructure
C. the server-centric infrastructure
D. the internet-centric infrastructure

Answer: B

Reference:http://www.connect-community.org/news/77784/New-this-Month-HP-to-Transform-Server-Market-with-Single-Platform-for-.htm


QUESTION NO: 2
What support offering is an integral part of HP electronic remote support?

A. HP Support Center
B. HP Telephone Support
C. HP e-Swap Product Replacement
D. HP Proactive Select

Answer: A

Reference:http://h20427.www2.hp.com/services/whitepaper/cn/zh/document/UF_SP24_en_20060401.pdf(page 3, topic 1.9)


QUESTION NO: 3
How does HP Remote help reduce risk for a customer’s IT infrastructure?

A. by remotely scanning PCs on the network
B. by proactively predicting peak usage traffic on the network
C. by proactively identifying problems before they occur
D. by remotely ordering hardware replacements for faulty devices

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-E46 HP it-exams

70-664 650-295 650-296

70-664 650-295 650-296  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team70-664 650-295 650-296  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 70-664 650-295 650-296 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 70-664 650-295 650-296  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 70-664 650-295 650-296  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

70-669 650-297 650-294

70-669 650-297 650-294  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team70-669 650-297 650-294  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 70-669 650-297 650-294 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 70-669 650-297 650-294  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 70-669 650-297 650-294  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E45 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E45 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E45 Technical Introduction to the HP SMB Portfolio our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
How do HP independent software vendor partners support HP server sales?

A. by consulting about how to align IT with business application requirements at the back end of a sale
B. by consulting about how to align their products and licenses to the customer's IT infrastructure
during merger and acquisition scenarios
C. by consulting about how to align IT with the Converged Infrastructure at the front end of the sale
D. by consulting about how to ensure continued functionality of business applications in migration or
transition scenarios

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
What is a likely outcome if a system is over-configured?

A. It will have a lower ROI for the investment.
B. It will run at performance levels ideal for SMBs.
C. It will not provide adequate service or scalability.
D. It will maximize the SMB customer's price to performance ratio.

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
What is a likely outcome if a system is under-configured?

A. It will not perform basic subroutines.
B. it will run at performance levels ideal for SMBs.
C. It will not provide adequate scalability.
D. it will maximize the SMB customer's price to performance ratio.

Answer: C

Practicetest HP2-E45 HP it-exams

650-293 650-042 646-578

650-293 650-042 646-578  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team650-293 650-042 646-578  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 650-293 650-042 646-578 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 650-293 650-042 646-578  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 650-293 650-042 646-578  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E43 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E43 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E43 Selling HP SMB Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Why does HP win in the networking area?
A. reduced complexity with infrastructure management tools such as Insight Control Remote Management
B. end-to-end visualization solutions and easy to deploy visualization bundles
C. mission critical services to keep business services running 24x7
D. "single pane-of-glass" management software for simplified lifecycle management

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
Your customer is experiencing slow response time for applications, and has diagnosed the problem as poor switch management. Why would a managed switch be a good solution?
A. Managed switches monitor network performance for bottlenecks.
B. Managed switches are designed to automate and reduce the configuration effort.
C. Managed switches are entry-level wireless access points that do not support dual networks.
D. Managed switches will keep all visitors off of the customer's wireless LAN

Answer: A



QUESTION NO: 3
Why does HP win in the server market?
A. reduced complexity with infrastructure management tools such as Insight Control Remote Management, Data Center Power Control. Intelligent Power Discovery, and Insight Remote Support Software
B. complex visualization without pre-configured bundles that can be readily implemented
C. "single pane-of-glass" management software for simplified lifecycle management across wired and wireless networks with integrated policy control and security for seamless operation and lower maintenance and support costs
D. long-term emphasis on low acquisition costs as opposed to overall value and return on investment (ROI)

Answer: A

Practicetest HP2-E43 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E38 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E38 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E38 Selling HP Enterprise Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
What is the advanced lifecycle management software for HP Integrity servers that allows your customers to instantly adjust to dynamic business demands?

A. HP Matrix Operating environment for HP-UX
B. Business Service Management environment
C. HP Serviceguard
D. Suse Linux environment

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
HP offers three types of HP-UX containers. Workload containers and HP 9000 containers are two types. What is the third type?

A. Storage container
B. System container
C. Server container
D. Database container

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
Which technology provides many of the features normally associated with nPartitions, but at a software level, and with greater core-level granularity?

A. HP-UX virtual partitions
B. HP-UX Secure Resource partitions
C. HP Recovery partitions
D. HP SMH partitions

Answer: A

Practicetest HP2-E38 HP it-exams

642-874 642-832 642-384

642-874 642-832 642-384  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team642-874 642-832 642-384  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 642-874 642-832 642-384 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 642-874 642-832 642-384  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 642-874 642-832 642-384  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP2-E37 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP2-E37 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP2-E37 selling HP Bladesystems our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
Which question would help uncover a BladeSystem opportunity for a customer with availability concerns?

A. Are you able to scale storage to match your growing server environment?
B. Are there business demands and opportunities that are not being met by your current servers?
C. What is your process for managing or moving workloads during system downtime?
D. Would a pre-configured solution help relieve IT service delivery pressures?

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
How can HP BladeSystem assist a customer that is planning a server consolidation or
virtualization project?

A. It can deliver high-performance computing with multiple management tools.
B. It can deliver the same compute power in a significantly reduced footprint.
C. It can eliminate the need for multiple different chassis.
D. It can eliminate the need for archival systems and processes.

Answer: B

Reference: http://h20195.www2.hp.com/v2/GetPDF.aspx/4AA0-5285ENW.pdf


QUESTION NO: 3
Which customer situation would indicate a possible Rack-to-Blade sales play?

A. The customer has just completed a data center consolidation.
B. The customer has data center constraints along with increasing costs for power and cooling.
C. The customer has made a decision to utilize a hosting service provider.
D. Recent news indicates that the customer is a merger/acquisition target.

Answer: B

Practicetest HP2-E37 HP it-exams

640-461 6006.1 070-664

640-461 6006.1 070-664   fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team640-461 6006.1 070-664   fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 640-461 6006.1 070-664 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 640-461 6006.1 070-664   fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 640-461 6006.1 070-664   exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-Y32 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-Y32 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-Y32 Design and Troubleshooting Open Standard Networks our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
Why might you make different decisions about which VLANs to permit on a port in an MSTP environment than in a PVST+ environment? (Select two.)
A. MSTP ports send the same number of BPDUs regardless of the number of VLANs
configured on them.
B. To receive a BPDU for an MSTP instance, the port must support each VLAN in that instance.
C. To transmit a BPDU for an MSTP instance, the port must support each VLAN in that instance.
D. MSTP creates Spanning Trees without regard to which VLANs are configured on the ports.
E. MSTP creates a different Spanning Tree for each VLAN as well as for the Common Spanning
Tree (CST).

Answer: AD


QUESTION 2
You have a network that is a single OSPF area. LAN B is connected to Router R1. LAN B is a stub network. A rogue OSPF router is connected to LAN B and by advertising duplicated routes it creates conflicts that can bring down the network.How should you prevent this?
A. Configure the whole area as an OSPF Stub Area.
B. Configure the whole area as OSPF NSSA.
C. Do not include LAN B's IP subnet address in R1's OSPF area configuration.
D. Configure R1's IP interface connected to LAN B as a silent OSPF interface.

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
A Cisco switch and an E5400 zl are connected together and can successfully ping each other. The Cisco switch does not see the LLDP neighbor information of the HP switch. What should you do?
A. Ensure that LLDP is enabled on the Cisco switch.
B. Ensure that the HP switch has CDP enabled.
C. Change the refresh interval of LLDP on the HP switch.
D. Ensure that the Cisco switch has CDP enabled.

Answer: A

Practicetest HP0-Y32 HP it-exams

310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527

310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 310-202 1Z0-526 1Z0-527  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-Y30 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-Y30 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-Y30 Implementing HP Networking Technologies our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
What is the effect of the following command issued at the CLI of an HP E5400 zl Series switch?
Switch# show logging 1

A. The CLI displays usage statistics for the previous hour.
B. The CLI displays a summary of events in the primary log.
C. The CLI displays only logged events for VLAN 1.
D. The CLI displays all events in the system log that include the string 1.

Answer: D

QUESTION 2
What is the relationship between the primary and secondary flash areas of an HP E8206 zl switch?

A. The primary area contains the switch's operating system. The secondary area contains the
configuration files.
B. The primary area contains the switch's operating system, which is automatically copied to
the secondary area whenever it is upgraded.
C. The primary and secondary images are managed independently, enabling the switch to be
started using either image.
D. The primary area contains the most recent software version. The secondary area always
holds an earlier version as a backup.

Answer: C



QUESTION 3
You must install an HP E-MSM AP that is at factory settings.
When must you change the AP's operating mode?

A. when the AP must interoperate with HP A-Series APs
B. when the AP must operate in controlled mode
C. when the AP must operate in autonomous mode
D. when the AP will act as a wireless bridge

Answer: C

Practicetest HP0-Y30 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S32 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S32 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-S32 HP BladeSystem Networking 2011 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
What are advantages of using Layer 3 to connect from the access layer to the core? (Select three.)

A. flatter network with fewer hops
B. equal cost balancing on all links with OSPF
C. extended broadcast domains
D. loop control using spanning tree
E. VRRP configuration not required
F. no link blocking involved

Answer: BEF



QUESTION 2
Which protocol is an industry-standard trunking protocol?

A. PAgP
B. HP Port Trunking
C. ISL
D. LACP

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
How does a Shared Uplink Set handle VLAN tags in Map mode?

A. accepts only untagged frames from the servers or the switch
B. accepts only tagged frames from the servers and only untagged frames from the switch
C. accepts tagged or untagged frames from the switch and only untagged frames from the servers
D. accepts tagged or untagged frames from the servers or the switch

Answer: D

Practicetest HP0-S32 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S31 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S31 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-S31 Managing Windows and Linux Server Systems our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
You manage a Red Hat EL server for your company. The server provides ftp services for the Engineering Division. You have installed a second server in a remote location to serve as a disaster recovery backup to the primary ftp server. You will use the rsync utility to replicate data from the primary to the backup server. The remote location is connected through an Internet link. Therefore, you have configured rsync to transfer data securely over ssh. However, you are having trouble automating the process because the ssh connection always prompts for a password. How can you resolve this problem?

A. Connect as a non-root user and use sudo to transfer data.
B. Connect to the remote location through a VPN client.
C. Install and use OpenSSH on both servers.
D. Configure ssh key-based authentication.

Answer: D


QUESTION 2
You have installed a new financial management application on a Windows Server 2008 R2 server for the Accounting Department of your company. You have configured the application correctly according to the instructions given to you. The accountant that is testing the application says that he has correctly installed and configured the client application on his workstation but it cannot connect to the server. What is a possible cause of this problem?

A. The SSL certificate for the server is misconfigured.
B. The DHCP service is not running on the server.
C. The Windows Firewall has not been opened for this application.
D. The server is not a member of a domain.

Answer: C

QUESTION 3
What is the name of the packet-filtering firewall software package that comes with a standard installation of a Red Hat EL server?

A. TCP Wrappers
B. NetACL
C. IP Tables
D. NetFirewall

Answer: C

Practicetest HP0-S31 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S30 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S30 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-S30 Design and Implementation of H SIM and HP Insight Control our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
What are two possible reasons that a managed server would show an unknown status
in the PF column of HP SIM? (Select two.)

A. The server is not licensed.
B. The polling timeout values need to be increased.
C. The system needs to be re-identified.
D. A hardware polling task has not run.
E. The server is not marked for monitoring.

Answer: AE



QUESTION 2
What should you consider when troubleshooting performance issues with HP Systems Insight Manager (HP SIM) running on a virtual machine (VM)?

A. The central management server (CMS) cannot be managed from HP SIM when it is
installed on a VM.
B. Access to the HP SIM console is limited to local access.
C. The HP SIM management domain is limited to approximately 1,000 nodes.
D. Out-of-band management is not permitted when HP SIM is installed on a VM.

Answer: C

QUESTION 3
When you are using the Managed Systems Setup Wizard to configure Secure Shell (SSH) on a target server, what must you consider?

A. Initial SSH configuration failure on iLO is a normal and expected condition.
B. The private key must be pushed to the target system.
C. Exchange of SSH keys with the CMS enables single sign-on (SSO) functionality.
D. You do not need to install SSH on a Windows server because it ships with Windows
by default.

Answer: A

Practicetest HP0-S30 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S26 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S26 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-S26 Integrating and Managing HP ProLiant ML/DL/SL Servers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
In an Intel Xeon 5500 Series server using DDR3 memory, which bus is used by a processor to access the memory of another processor?

A. Front Side Bus
B. QuickPath Interconnect
C. Direct Connect Architecture
D. Hyper Transport Bus

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which tool is used to configure the BIOS and array during the initial server deployment using HP Insight Rapid Deployment software (RDP)?

A. System Configuration Tool
B. Initial Deployment Configurator
C. SmartStart Scripting Toolkit
D. Array Configuration Utility

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
What do Packaged Clusters provide? (Select three.)

A. One part number for all necessary cluster components preassembled
B. Color-coded cables for easy cable connections
C. multiple processor support
D. multiple operating system support (Windows 2003, Linux, and Windows Server 2008)
E. multiple wired cables for better cable routing

Answer: A,B,D

Practicetest HP0-S26 HP it-exams

070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708

070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 070-433 70-642BIG5 050-708  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-M43 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-M43 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-M43 HP Service Manager 9.x Softwares our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION 1
Which additional modules are available to Service Desk customers who migrate to Service Manager? (Select four.)

A. UCMDB Foundation
B. Incident Management
C. Problem Management
D. Change Management
E. Scheduled Maintenance
F. Request Management
G. Service Catalog
H. Service Level Management

Answer: AEFG



QUESTION 2
The Web Application Server belongs to which Service Manager application tier?

A. Server Tier
B. Web Tier
C. Client Tier
D. Database Tier

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
When installing Service Manager 9.x, what does the Service Manager Application Server contain?

A. RunTime Engine and configuration files including utilities to connect to the RDBMS
B. Tomcat or another Web Application Server
C. Apache or another Web Server
D. Service Manager applications in the RDBMS

Answer: A

Practicetest HP0-M43 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S25 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-S25 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-S25 Implementing ProLiant ML/DL/SL Servers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


QUESTION NO: 1
You have registered and downloaded the following installation iso file from https://h20392.www2.hp.com/ecommerce/efulfillment/downloadpage.do?downloadKey=xxxxxx VMware vSphere Hypervisor 4 (ESXi) and Updates - 4.1 U1 Apr 2011 ESXi HD-USB-SDImgeInstlr
(Z7550-00096.iso) What is required in order for servers installed using the iso file above to be managed by HP Systems Insight Manager?

A. WBEM driver for the related server
B. download the HP version of vSphere Client
C. configure management network on DCUI
D. configure lockdown mode on DCUI

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
You receive a new HP ProLiant DL380 G7 server that shipped in the original packing box. What do you get as part of the HP Insight Foundation Suite for ProLiant? (Select two.)

A. HP Firmware DVD
B. HP SmartStart CD
C. HP Insight Software DVD
D. HP RackSystem Documentation CD
E. Microsoft Windows Server 2008 DVD Kit
F. VMware vSphere 5 DVD Kit

Answer: B,C


QUESTION NO: 3
You installed a new Smart Array P812 adapter in a DL380 G7 server. Which advanced features are included in the P812 adapter that are not available on the on-board Smart Array adapter?(Select three.)

A. mirror splitting and recombining in offline mode
B. enabling Quad Domain for redundant pathways for external drives
C. enabling multi-mode connection speeds from the SAS interface and support for legacy SAS drives
D. Shrink Array operation
E. enabling support for both parallel SCSI and SAS interface on the server adapter
F. transferring the contents of a disk array from one set of physical drives to a second set of physical drives

Answer: A,D,F
Practicetest HP0-S25 HP it-exams

000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553

000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 000-Z04 1Z1-052 640-553  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-M36 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-M36 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-M36 HP Data Protector Software Fundamentals for Windows our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION 1
You move a Cell Manager from 32-bit Windows 2003 to 64-bit Windows 2008. Which perl script helps you accomplish this task?

A. omnidbtool.pl
B. omnimigrate.pl
C. dbtool.pl
D. winomnimigrate.pl

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
On a Windows Cell Manager, which process runs as an application process and NOT as a service?

A. Cell Request Server (CRS)
B. Media Management Daemon (MMD)
C. Raima Database Server (RDS)
D. Remote Connection Daemon (inet)

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
What must you do when upgrading cluster-aware clients to HP Data Protector Software 6.1?

A. Uninstall the client software on the clients, re-install the new client software locally,
and re- import the clients into the cell.
B. Upgrade each cluster node locally and then re-import the virtual server into the cell.
C. Remotely install the virtual server and re-import the client nodes into the cell.
D. Delete all clientnodes from the cell, remotely install the client software and re-import
the virtual server into the cell.

Answer: B

Practicetest HP0-M36 HP it-exams

CISM CSSBB 4A0-104

CISM CSSBB 4A0-104  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamCISM CSSBB 4A0-104  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers CISM CSSBB 4A0-104 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests CISM CSSBB 4A0-104  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification CISM CSSBB 4A0-104  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-M28 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-M28 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-M28 Implementing HP Asset Manager Software our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which IT Asset Management best practices are incorporated within Asset Manager? (Select three.)
A. Asset Tracking
B. Identity Management
C. Service Management
D. Network Management
E. Contract Management
F. Procurement Management

Answer: A,E,F


QUESTION NO: 2
Where can you execute an Asset Manager query without impacting performance?
A. in the action script
B. in the validity script
C. in the mandatory script
D. in the workflow triggering script

Answer: A



QUESTION NO: 3
What is the LEAST efficient type of calculated field?
A. self
B. AQL
C. BASIC script
D. calculated string

Answer: C

Practicetest HP0-M28 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J53 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J53 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-J53 Designing HP Storage Datacenter Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION 1
Which statement is true about using a StoreOnce NAS share for backup?

A. The first 24MB of a file are not deduplicated.
B. 50% of the space can use a general purpose NAS.
C. NFS NAS shares offer a greater deduplication ratio than a Virtual Tape Library (VTL).
D. Virtual Tape Library (VTL) and NAS traffic should be split across the D2D adapters.

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
Which switch configuration for B-Series switches must be used in an HP Continuous Access EVA
environment for all Fibre Channel switches in the path from the source array to the destination array when the HP-FC protocol is used? (Select two.)
A. enable port-based routing
B. enable Exchange-based routing
C. enable in-order delivery
D. disable in-order delivery
E. connect EVA ports to ASIC0
F. connect EVA ports to ASIC1

Answer: AC



QUESTION 3
Which vSphere configuration menu must be used in order to enable iSCSI functionality for
communication with a P4000 network using vSphere4?

A. Network Adapters
B. Storage Adapters
C. Software Configuration
D. Storage Configuration

Answer: B

Practicetest HP0-J53 HP it-exams

C_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30

C_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamC_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers C_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests C_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification C_EPMBPC_70 HP2-Z22 C-BOWI-30  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-J51 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J51 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-J51 Installing HP StorageWorks Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION 1
For the X1000 Network Storage System, the HP Storage Server Management Console provides access to which function?

A. Telnet Remote Console
B. File Server Resource Manager
C. Quick Setup Wizard
D. Desktop Indexing Control

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
When is it useful to limit the maximum size of a virtual cartridge of a D2D system?

A. when backup software vendors specify that only small cartridges are supported
B. when there are only server image backups and you need one cartridge per server
C. when you know you will be moving data to a physical tape with a smaller cartridge capacity
D. when you only have small files to back up

Answer: C

QUESTION 3
When installing an HP P2000 G3 Storage Array, which type of access is available to the storage system when a DHCP server is not currently available on the management LAN?

A. serial cable to the controller
B. web-based GUI
C. crossover cable to the array management port
D. no access

Answer: B

Practicetest HP0-J51 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J49 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J49 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-J49 Designing and Implementing HP Cloud Solutions using HP 3PARn our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION 1
You are troubleshooting a 3PAR T400 solution. The solution has four nodes and iSCSI. Which configuration rule must you be aware of?

A. At least one node in each controller pair must have an iSCSI card.
B. Only one node must have an iSCSI card.
C. Both nodes in a controller pair must have iSCSI cards.
D. All four nodes must have iSCSI cards.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
What differentiates the HP 3PAR solution from the HP StorageWorks EVA solution?

A. volumes striped over many disk drives
B. simple management interface
C. automatic load balancing
D. mesh-active cluster

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
What benefits most from the multi-tenancy feature of the HP 3PAR Storage System?

A. backup-to-disk solutions
B. entry level to mid-range solutions
C. service provider environments
D. $/MB-sensitive environments

Answer: C

Practicetest HP0-J49 HP it-exams

HP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211

HP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamHP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers HP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests HP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification HP0-M31 E20-651 A00-211  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

HP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101

HP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamHP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers HP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests HP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification HP2-Z17 E20-860 NS0-101  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-J46 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-J46 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-J46 Designing and Implementation HP Enterprise Backup Solution our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
During installation of a Windows backup solution the backup software receives timeouts while performing remote installation of clients. Which actions should be performed to resolve this issue? (Select two.)

A. Install clients from local CD order DVD.
B. Check DNS if hosts are resolved correctly.
C. Verify firewall settings on remote hosts.
D. Modify host lists to manually add clients.
E. Reinstall installation server functionality on the backup server.

Answer: B,C



QUESTION NO: 2
When configuring deduplication on a VLS9000, what must be considered in order to derive the greatest benefit from deduplication? (Select two.)

A. number of slots
B. retention period
C. backup window
D. virtual cartridge sizing
E. number of virtual libraries

Answer: B,D



QUESTION NO: 3
What is the function of Media Containers?

A. transport media between data centers, vaults, and sites
B. hold media that are of the same type and have similar properties
C. store media in vaults to protect the data separately from the live data in the data centers
D. logically group media in HP Data Protectorsoftware

Answer: A

Practicetest HP0-J46 HP it-exams

1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870

1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 1Y0-A20 1Z0-878 1Z0-870  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HP0-D13 HP it-exams

Practicetest HP0-D13 HP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HP0-D13 Technical Introduction to the HP Enterprise Portfolio,Rev. 11.41 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which statement is true about ProLiant DL2000 Multi Node servers?

A. They were designed to double server density to maximize data center floor space.
B. They enable you to set aside extra capacity for unexpected increases in power usage.
C. They consist of up to four independent DL170e G6 servers in a 2U ProLiant e2000 G6 chassis.
D. They deliver a 23:1 consolidation ratio, increasing operational efficiencies so that they can pay for themselves in as little as two months.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
How does HP make VirtualSystem available to customers?

A. as a choice of modular systems for small, midsize, or large deployments
B. as a free download to manage multiple server and storage systems
C. as a single application with multiple modules for managing third-party products
D. as a stand-alone solution for operating system fault isolation

Answer: A

QUESTION NO: 3
What does an HP Converged Infrastructure deliver?

A. HP products that enable customers to plan infrastructure upgrades with minimal downtime and management
B. a rip-and-replace process that minimizes administrative overhead when installing hardware and applications
C. an approach for accelerating time-to-business value for large and mid-sized enterprises
D. a tool for configuring HP storage stacks, server stacks, and networking stacks to optimize performance

Answer: C

Practicetest HP0-D13 HP it-exams

HP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125

HP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamHP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers HP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests HP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification HP3-X08 E20-818 FN0-125  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest HH0-250 Hitachi it-exams

Practicetest HH0-250 Hitachi it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HH0-250 Hitachi Data Systems Implementer File Services-NAS our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Your customer wants to obtain the Management Information Base (MIB) to integrate a Hitachi NAS Platform into their Event Management framework. What are two ways to obtain the MIB? (Choose two.)

A. Download the Enterprise MIB module from EVS.
B. Download the Enterprise MIB module from the Web Manager GUI.
C. Download the Enterprise MIB module from HiTrack.
D. Contact the Hitachi Data Systems Support Center for the latest Enterprise MIB.

Answer: B,D


QUESTION NO: 2
You are implementing a new Hitachi NAS Platform and must configure the chunk size parameter for the storage pool. What are two considerations to achieve this? (Choose two.)
A. Chunk size defines the increment by which a file system will grow when expanded.
B. A small chunk size will give better performance for small files.
C. The chunk size cannot be larger than the system drive (SD) size.
D. A file system can contain up to a maximum of 1023 chunks.

Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 3
You are implementing a four node Hitachi NAS Platform cluster at a customer site. Where does the cluster quorum reside?

A. on the first node of the cluster
B. on a SMU
C. on the last node of the cluster
D. on any of the cluster nodes

Answer: B

Practicetest HH0-250 Hitachi it-exams

HP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095

HP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamHP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers HP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests HP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification HP3-X09 ST0-090 ST0-095  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest FM0-307 FileMaker it-exams

Practicetest FM0-307 FileMaker it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

FM0-307 Developer Essentials for FileMaker 12 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which two statements are true regarding the Go to Related Records script step? (Choose two.)

A. If there are no related records, the destination layout will have 0 records in the found set.
B. The script step can specify a layout in another FileMaker Pro 12 file as the destination layout.
C. The script step has the option to display the related records in any of the file's existing windows.
D. The script step has the option to show records related to the current record only or to all the records in the found set.
E. The Go to Related Records script step will not work if the destination table is based on an External Data Source of type ODBC.

Answer: B,D

QUESTION NO: 2
A FileMaker Pro 12 database has a script called MyScript that contains only the following script step:
Install OnTimer Script [Hello World; Interval:60]
From Window_01 the user runs MyScript and then creates a new window (Window_02). From Window_02 the user creates a new window (Window_03).
What is the status of the script Hello World?

A. The Hello World script runs immediately when each new window opens.
B. The Hello World script will continue to run on Window_01 and Window_02 and Window_03.
C. The Hello World script will continue to run on Window_01 but will not run on Window_02 or Window_03.
D. The Hello World script will continue to run on Window_01 until it triggers for the first time in one of the new windows.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which two script steps, if executed by a user in a hosted file with multiple logged-in users, can affect the active sessions of other users? (Choose two.)

A. Enable Account [Deactivate]
B. Refresh Window [Flush cached join results]
C. Insert From Index [Select; Product::description]
D. Install Menu Set ["My Menu Set"; Use as file default]
E. Insert From URL [Select; Product::description; "http://widgets.com"]
F. Set Selection [Product::Description; Start Position: 1; End Position: Length
(Product::description)]

Answer: C,E

Practicetest FM0-307 FileMaker it-exams

Practicetest HH0-120 Hitachi it-exams

Practicetest HH0-120 Hitachi it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

HH0-120 Hitachi Data Systems Storage Foundations - Modular Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
An AMS family storage system connected to a USP V as external storage is upgraded with new capacity. The customer has created new LUs to be presented to the USP V. Which statement is correct?

A. LUs must be at least 1GB in size.
B. LUs must be formatted.
C. LUs must be assigned to different FC ports.
D. LUs from different RAID Groups must be used.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which statement is correct when a ShadowImage pair is created and the OS file system on the PVol contains no files?

A. The entire contents of the P-Vol are copied to the S-Vol.
B. Data is only copied to the S-Vol when the first file is created on the P-Vol.
C. Only the basic OS format information is copied from the P-Vol to the S-Vol.
D. The ShadowImage pair cannot be created without any data being present on the S-Vol.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
A storage administrator is unable to create new remote path settings using TrueCopy software on a Hitachi AMS2300 and is no longer able to make S-Vol changes using the ShadowImage software. New pool settings cannot be defined using the Copy-on-Write (COW) Snapshot feature.
What is the next step that the storage administrator must perform?

A. Re-enable this functionality through the CCI.
B. Create a ticketed request to the HDS Global Support Center.
C. Verify license key information in normal mode in Storage Navigator Modular 2.
D. Switch to management mode in Storage Navigator Modular 2 to verify license key information.

Answer: D

Practicetest HH0-120 Hitachi it-exams

1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003

1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers 1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests 1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification 1Z0-877 ST0-096 PK1-003  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest FCNSP Fortinet it-exams

Practicetest FCNSP Fortinet it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

FCNSP FortiOS 4.0 GA, FortiAnalyzer 4.0 GA(FCNSP v4.0) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
In order to local-share traffic using multiple static routes, the routes must be configured with
A. the same distance and same priority
B. the same distance and the same weight
C. the same distance but each of them must be assigned a unique priority.
D. a distance equal to its desired weight for ECMP but all must have the same priority.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
A FortiGate unit is configured with multiple VDOMs. An administrative account on the device has been assigned a Scope value of VDOM:root.
Which of the following items would an administrator logging in using this account NOT be able to configure?
A. Firewall addresses
B. DHCP servers
C. FortiGuard Distribution Network configuration
D. PPTP VPN configuration

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
In the Tunnel Mode widget of the web portal, the administrator has configured an IP Pool and enabled spilt tunneling.
Which if the following statements is true about the IP address used by the SSL VPN client?
A. The IP pool specified in the SSL-VPN Tunnel Mode Widget options will override the IP address range defined in the SSL-VPN settings.
B. Because spilt tunneling is enabled, no IP address needs to be assigned for the SSL tunnel to be established.
C. The IP address range specified in SSL-VPN Settings will override the IP address range in the SSL-VPN Tunnel Mode Widget Option.

Answer: A

Practicetest FCNSP Fortinet it-exams

HP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508

HP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamHP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers HP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests HP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification HP3-X11 642-383 9L0-508  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest FCNSA Fortinet it-exams

Practicetest FCNSA Fortinet it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

FCNSA fortine certified network security administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following items represent the minimum configuration steps an administrator must perform to enable Data Leak Prevention for traffic flowing through the FortiGate unit? (Select all that apply.)

A. Assign a DLP sensor in a firewall policy.
B. Apply one or more DLP rules to a firewall policy.
C. Enable DLP globally using the config sys dlp command in the CLI.
D. Define one or more DLP rules.
E. Define a DLP sensor.
F. Apply a DLP sensor to a DoS sensor policy.

Answer: A,D,E


QUESTION NO: 2
Because changing the operational mode to Transparent resets device (or vdom) to all defaults,
which precautions should an Administrator take prior to performing this? (Select all that apply.)

A. Backup the configuration.
B. Disconnect redundant cables to ensure the topology will not contain layer 2 loops.
C. Set the unit to factory defaults.
D. Update IPS and AV files.

Answer: A,B

QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following is true regarding Switch Port Mode?

A. Allows all internal ports to share the same subnet.
B. Provides separate routable interfaces for each internal port.
C. An administrator can select ports to be used as a switch.
D. Configures ports to be part of the same broadcast domain.

Answer: A

Practicetest FCNSA Fortinet it-exams

Practicetest EX0-105 EXIN.Inc it-exams

Practicetest EX0-105 EXIN.Inc it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

EX0-105 Information Security Foundation based on ISO/IEC 27002 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION 1
Which one of the threats listed below can occur as a result of the absence of a physical measure?

A. A user can view the files belonging to another user.
B. A server shuts off because of overheating.
C. A confidential document is left in the printer.
D. Hackers can freely enter the computer network.

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
What is the best description of a risk analysis?

A. A risk analysis is a method of mapping risks without looking at company processes.
B. A risk analysis helps to estimate the risks and develop the appropriate security measures.
C. A risk analysis calculates the exact financial consequences of damages.

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
What is the goal of an organization's security policy?

A. To provide direction and support to information security
B. To define all threats to and measures for ensuring information security
C. To document all incidentsthat threaten the reliability of information
D. To document all procedures required to maintain information security

Answer: A

Practicetest EX0-105 EXIN.Inc it-exams

C_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136

C_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamC_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers C_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests C_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification C_TFIN22_05 C_BOWI_30 ST0-136  exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Practicetest EX0-104 EXIN.Inc it-exams

Practicetest EX0-104 EXIN.Inc it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

EX0-104 TMap Next Foundation our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which TMap phase may be located on the critical path?
A. Planning and Control
B. Specification
C. Execution
D. Preparation

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
What is the correct description of the term est level?
A. the information that defines the required system behavior
B. a group of test activities with the attention of checking the information system in respect of a number of correlated (part aspects of) quality characteristics
C. a group of test activities that are managed and executed collectively

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
During which TMap phase is testing 'dynamic implicit'?
A. Specification
B. Execution
C. Preparation

Answer: B

Practicetest EX0-104 EXIN.Inc it-exams

C_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470

C_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470  fromit-exams.com come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert teamC_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470  fromit-exams.com that we have and because of our past performance.

 

We believe in helping our customers achieve their goals. For this reason, we take great care while preparing our Questions and Answers C_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470 fromit-exams.com . Our practice tests C_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470  fromit-exams.com are prepared with the help of highly professional people from the industry, so we benefit from their vast experience and knowledge.

 

If you prepare for the exam using our IT-Exams.com testing engine, we guarantee your success in the first attempt. If you do not pass the Certification C_TFIN52_05 C_TB1200_07 1D0-470   exam fromit-exams.com on your first attempt, we will give you free update.

Freitag, 11. Januar 2013

Freitag, froh!!

Freitag, froh!!

Was will ich heute machen?

Was will ich heute machen?

Practicetest EADA10 Esri it-exams

Practicetest EADA10 Esri it-exams

EADA10 ArcGIS Desktop Associate our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
An ArcGIS user is trying to add data from an enterprise database to an ArcMap document but is unable to see any feature classes in the database.
Why is the ArcGIS user unable to add the data?

A. A folder connection between ArcCatalog and the data location is missing
B. The ArcGIS user has inappropriate permissions to access the data
C. Another user has a schema lock on that database
D. Another user owns the data in a public version

Answer: B



QUESTION NO: 2
Which effect does applying a join in ArcMap to a layer and a stand-alone table have?

A. It will create a new output feature class containing the layer and associated data
B. It will temporarily append the associated data to the layer's attribute table
C. It will permanently append the associated data to the layer's attribute table
D. It will create a new output layer containing the layer and associated data

Answer: A



QUESTION NO: 3
An ArcGIS user is creating a road, which will need to be snapped to the border of a land parcel.
Which snapping option must be turned on?

A. Point snapping
B. End snapping
C. Vertex snapping
D. Edge snapping

Answer: D

Practicetest EADA10 Esri it-exams

Practicetest EX0-101 EXIN.Inc it-exams

Practicetest EX0-101 EXIN.Inc it-exams

EX0-101 ITIL Foundation v.3 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1. Which of the following BEST describes the goal of Access Management?
A. To provide a channel for users to request and receive standard services
B. Provides the rights for users to be able to use a service or group of services
C. To prevent Problems and resulting Incidents from happening
D. To detect security events and make sense of them

Answer: B


2. Which of the following is the BEST description of a centralised Service Desk?
A. The desk is co-located within or physically close to the user community it serves
B. The desk uses technology and other support tools to give the impression that multiple desk locations are in one place
C. The desk provides 24 hour global support
D. There is a single desk in one location serving the whole organization

Answer: D


3. Service Design emphasizes the importance of the 'Four Ps'. Which of the following is a correct list of these 'Four Ps'?
A. People, Products, Partners, Profit
B. People, Process, Products, Partners
C. Potential, Preparation, Performance, Profit
D. People, Potential, Products, Performance

Answer: B

Practicetest EX0-101 EXIN.Inc it-exams

Practicetest E20-007 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E20-007 EMC it-exams

E20-007 Data Science Associate Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
You are analyzing data in order to build a classifier model. You discover non-linear data and discontinuities that will affect the model. Which analytical method would you recommend?

A. Decision Trees
B. Logistic Regression
C. ARIMA
D. Linear Regression

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
What is an appropriate data visualization to use in a presentation for a project sponsor?

A. Bar chart
B. Pie chart
C. Box and Whisker plot
D. Density plot

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
In a Student's t-test, what is the meaning of the p-value?

A. it is the area under the appropriate tails of the Student's distribution
B. it is the "power" of the Student's t-test
C. it is the mean of the distribution for the null hypothesis
D. it is the mean of the distribution for the alternate hypothesis

Answer: A

Practicetest E20-007 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E20-591 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E20-591 EMC it-exams

E20-591 Backup and Recovery Solutions Exam for Technology Architects our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
An EMC Disk Library customer is considering using Remote Copy between two engines. A policy will be configured to copy data when 50 MB of data is sent to the virtual tape. How does the data transfer occur?

A. Whole content of the virtual tape is sent to the target once the first 50 MB is stored in the buffer
B. Incremental data is sent to the target engine when the virtual tape is unmounted and 50 MB of new data has been written
C. Incremental data is sent immediately to the target engine as soon as 50 MB of new data is received by the virtual tape during the backup process
D. Incremental data is sent to the target in 50 MB increments whenever the virtual tape is idle

Answer: B



QUESTION NO: 2
Given an RPO, which factors must be considered when designing an EMC NetWorker backup solution?

A. Server parallelism and target sessions
B. Amount of backup data and backup devices
C. Retention period and backup level
D. Multiplexing and client parallelism

Answer: B



QUESTION NO: 3
A customer has two sites with 50 clients at each site. The customer wants the backup to occur locally on tape media at each site and would like to have a single EMC NetWorker datazone for the entire environment. A NetWorker server has already been deployed at one site. Which NetWorker component should be deployed at the second site?

A. Dedicated storage node
B. Deduplication node
C. Storage node
D. NetWorker server

Answer: A

Practicetest E20-591 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E20-818 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E20-818 EMC it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

E20-818 Symmetrix Solutions Expert Exam for Implementation Engineers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
An SRDF/Star solution has been deployed. The customer is concerned about data consistency at
the target sites during the initial Star configuration process.
When is the data consistent at the asynchronous target site?

A. After the completion of the Protect step
B. After the completion of the Connect step
C. As soon as the Connect step is initiated
D. As soon as the Protect step is initiated

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2

A customer has implemented a two-node Windows 2008 MFC cluster with SRDF/CE. SRDF
device pairs are in SRDF/S mode. The customer wants to add additional disks to a cluster disk
group.
What is the recommended tool to add additional disks to a cluster disk group?

A. Microsoft Failover Cluster Manager
B. Cluster Enabler Manager
C. Solutions Enabler
D. Symmetrix Management Console
Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
You plan to implement SRDF/CE with a geographically dispersed two-node Microsoft cluster. The
sites are 500 miles apart. Which Quorum model should you use?

A. Majority Node Set with File Share Witness
B. Majority Node Set
C. Shared Quorum Disk
D. Majority Node Set with Witness Disk

Answer: A

Practicetest E20-818 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E22-275 EMC it-exams

Practicetest E22-275 EMC it-exams

E22-275 recoverpoint backup and recovery specialist exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
You have been assigned to assess a company's environment. They are concerned that the number of SANTap ITLs is about to reach the supported limits and would like recommendations.
They have an eight-node RecoverPoint cluster with SANTap running on their MDS-9222i switches with SSM cards. SAN-OS and SSI versions are installed in the switches.
Additional costs beyond license upgrades are not expected. What do you recommend?

A. Upgrade switches to the latest NX-OS and SSI and run SANTap using module 1.
B. Install one additional MSM 18/4 in each switch.
C. Run the refresh_santap_view command to purge stale ITLs from the system.
D. Remove the splitters from the application and rediscover them with a new fresh state.

Answer: A



QUESTION NO: 2
You are implementing RecoverPoint with a Cisco SANTap splitter in CRR. RecoverPoint is unable to get the SCSI-2/SCSI-3 reservation information of a Microsoft Cluster server that is part of a consistency group, and volumes are getting a Reservation error. You are checking all the required zones and noticed a required zone is missing.
Which one is missing?

A. RPA to HBA
B. RPA to CVT
C. RPA to storage
D. RPA to AVT

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
A customer has two MDS 9000s. They are going to install the RecoverPoint with SANTap solution, so they will install one 18/4-port MSM on each switch.
Which formula is used to calculate AVT Reservation ITLs for the customer’s environment?

A. #AVT Reservation ITLs = #volumes
B. #AVT Reservation ITLs = #host ITLs x #RPA initiators x #RPAs
C. #AVT Reservation ITLs = 26 x # RPA initiators x #RPAs
D. #AVT Reservation ITLs = 0

Answer: A

Practicetest E22-275 EMC it-exams

Practicetest C-TBIT44-71 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-TBIT44-71 SAP it-exams

C-TBIT44-71 Process Integration with SAP NetWeaver (PI 7.1) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
You use a receiver determination to define one or more receivers for a sender communication component and an outbound service interface. You can make the receiver determination conditional on the value of a field in the payload.
What do you do to set up this content-based routing?

A. Write a value mapping function in the Enterprise Services Repository and import it into the Integration Builder.
B. Specify alternative identifiers in the definition of the party.
C. You can only set up content-based routing by using the Configuration Assistant.
D. Use the Condition Editor to enter conditions (XPATH/Context object) for routing.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
Process Integration provides a lot of flexibility during the mapping/transformation process from source document to target. This flexibility includes the usage of multiple mapping steps.
Which statement correctly describes the characteristics of combined mapping steps?

A. All of the mapping steps must be of one type of mapping, e.g. they must all be Message
Mapping, or they must all be XSLT mapping.
B. Multiple mapping steps can be used, only by using Java mapping, due to Java's ability to access internal mapping programs.
C. Only by using XSLT mapping can we use multiple mapping steps. This is based on using "includes" of multiple XSLT's within the mapping process.
D. Any mapping method can be used with any combination. E.g. you can create a graphical Message Mapping followed by Java and XSLT mapping.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
You are developing a Message Mapping. In the mapping description, the source values for the target elements first name, middle name and last name are all assigned to the same source element (e.g. name). This results in a repeating occurrence for this source element.
Which standard function would you recommend for mapping the repeating element 'name' in the source to the specific fields (e.g. first name, middle name and last name) in the target structure?

A. There is no such standard function in Process Integration, you would need to write a user defined function.
B. You can use the "CopyValue" function in the Constant function group.
C. You can use the "SplitByValue" function in the Node function group.
D. You can use the "ValueMapping" function in the Conversions function group.

Answer: B

Practicetest C-TBIT44-71 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-TERP10-60 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-TERP10-60 SAP it-exams

C-TERP10-60 SAP Certified Business Associate with SAP ERP 6.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1.You can generate training proposals for employees if Personnel Development isintegrated with which of the following? (Choose the correct answer)
A. Compensation management
B. ESS
C. SAP BW
D. Time and Event Management

Answer: D


2.Which of the following are examples of employee time data? (Choose all thatapply)
A. Leave
B. Illness
C. Substitutions
D. Business trips

Answer: A,B,C,D


3.Which of the following are CATS user interfaces? (Choose all that apply)
A. CATS Notebook
B. CATS time clock
C. CATS regular
D. CATS classic
E. CATS portal solution

Answer: A,C,D

Practicetest C-TERP10-60 SAP it-exams

Practicetest CTFL-001 ISTQB it-exams

Practicetest CTFL-001 ISTQB it-exams

CTFL-001 ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following is a valid drawback of independent testing? 1 credit

A. Developer and independent testing will overlap and waste resources.
B. Developers loose the sense of responsibility and independent testers may become a
bottleneck.
C. Independent testers need extra education and always cost more.
D. Independent testers will become a bottleneck and introduce problems in incident management.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Based on the information given in the scenario, identify how the team could be improved most effectively? 2 credits

A. By providing training in the payroll domain
B. By providing a workshop on test design techniques
C. By providing specific training on the systems being tested
D. By providing training on reviewing requirements

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following team roles would be most appropriate to enhance the team and why? 2 credits

A. A person with the ability to complete tasks
B. A quality assurance officer
C. A person with in-depth technical skills
D. A person who brings new ideas to the team

Answer: D

Practicetest CTFL-001 ISTQB it-exams

Practicetest C-PXSUP-90 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-PXSUP-90 SAP it-exams

C-PXSUP-90 SAP Certified Associate - Support Consultant for Incident Management with SAP Business All-in-One our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
Very High (Priority 1) messages that are opened outside normal business hours are automatically sent to SAP.
Where can the business hours be maintained for each customer organization?

A. Call the transaction BP and open the business partner of type Organization.
B. Call the transaction SPRO.
C. Call the transaction BUSINESS_HOURS.
D. Call the transaction BUS_HOU.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Where do you find the declaration of global data objects in an ABAP program? (Choose two)

A. Anywhere in the program.
B. At the beginning of any processing block.
C. At the beginning of a report program.
D. In the program's Top-Include.

Answer: C,D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following terms would be considered hits, if you performed a Note Search on'integra*'? (Choose two)

A. Integration
B. Integrity
C. Integral
D. Integer

Answer: A,C

Practicetest C-PXSUP-90 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-SRM-70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-SRM-70 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C-SRM-70 SAP Certified Application Associate - Supplier Relationship Management with SAP SRM 7.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
To which business objects can you add customer-specific fields using the Implementation Guide (IMG)? (Choose two)

A. Invoices
B. Product categories
C. Unit of measures
D. Shopping carts

Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 2
What SAP technology is used for the user interface on the SRM server 7.0?

A. Internet Transaction Server
B. mattext644
C. Java WebDynpro
D. ABAP WebDynpro

Answer: D

QUESTION NO: 3
Which of following are external business partners? (Choose two)

A. Contact person
B. Bidder
C. Ship-to address
D. Invoice recipient
E. Purchasing company

Answer: A,B

Practicetest C-SRM-70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-TB1200-07 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-TB1200-07 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C-TB1200-07 SAP Certified Implementation Consultant SAP Business One 2007 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
You are responsible for the prices of your sales items. The SAP Business One system offers a lot of functions related to item prices. Which of the following statements are true regarding pricing in SAP Business One?

A. In the SAPBusines One system, prices for items are defined in price lists.
B. A price list is assigned to a business partner.
C. When you add a sales order in the SAP Business One system, the price defaults to the price defined in the price list or the special price.
D. When you add a sales order in the SAP Business One system, you always enter the price manually per item.
E. When you add a sales order in the SAP Business One system, you can change the default price list in the document.

Answer: A,B,C,D,E


QUESTION NO: 2
You receive a call requesting an order of 10 pallets from Lee Imports. Lee Imports is currently set up as a lead in the master data. Which of the following statements is true?

A. You may create sales orders, deliveries and invoices for this business partner.
B. You can create a sales quotation but must convert the lead to a customer before creating a sales order.
C. You can create a sales order for this business partner but cannot bill them without converting the lead to a customer.
D. You can only create activities and sales opportunities with leads.

Answer: C



QUESTION NO: 3
Which report will allow you to value your inventory and review differences that would occur if you used a different costing method from the one defined globally for your items?

A. Items list
B. Inventory Posting Report
C. Inventory Valuation Report
D. Last Prices Report

Answer: C

Practicetest C-TB1200-07 SAP it-exams

Practicetest CISSP ISC it-exams

Practicetest CISSP ISC it-exams

CISSP Certified Information Systems Security Professional our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.


IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION NO: 1
When two different keys encrypt a plaintext message into the same
ciphertext, this situation is known as:
A. Cryptanalysis.
B. Public key cryptography.
C. Hashing.
D. Key clustering.
Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
What do the message digest algorithms MD2, MD4 and MD5 have in
common?
A. They are all used in the Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA).
B. They all take a message of arbitrary length and produce a message
digest of 128-bits.
C. They all take a message of arbitrary length and produce a message
digest of 160-bits.
D. They are all optimized for 32-bit machines.
Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following items BEST describes the standards addressed
by Title II, Administrative Simplification, of the Health Insurance
Portability and Accountability Act (US Kennedy-Kassebaum Health
Insurance and Portability Accountability Act -HIPAA-Public Law 104-19)?
A. Transaction Standards, to include Code Sets; Security and Electronic
Signatures and Privacy
B. Security and Electronic Signatures and Privacy
C. Transaction Standards, to include Code Sets; Unique Health
Identifiers; Security and Electronic Signatures and Privacy
D. Unique Health Identifiers; Security and Electronic Signatures and Privacy
Answer: C

Practicetest CISSP ISC it-exams

Practicetest C-HANAIMP-1 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C-HANAIMP-1 SAP it-exams

C-HANAIMP-1 SAP Certified Application Associate - SAP HANA 1.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C-HANAIMP-1 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
You have imported models from the development system. What is the recommended way to activate dependent models in SAP HANA?

A. Use the Activate with History function.
B. Use the Where-Used List function.
C. Use the Cascade Activate function.
D. Activate each view manually.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which SAP BusinessObjects reporting tool should you use to answer ad-hoc questions and interact with shared information?

A. Crystal Reports
B. Dashboards
C. Explorer
D. WebIntelligence

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
How can you assess the quality of the loaded data in SAP HANA? (Choose two)

A. Configure the SAP Landscape Transformation tool to implement the data quality process.
B. Compare data from reports in SAP BusinessObjects against the SAP HANA
_SYS_STATISTICS table.
C. Perform master data quality checks in SAP ERP prior to replication in SAP HANA.
D. Compare reports in SAP BusinessObjects against source data for specific selections.

Answer: C,D


Practicetest C-HANAIMP-1 SAP it-exams

Practicetest CISA Isaca it-exams

Practicetest CISA Isaca it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

CISA Isaca CISA our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following is a characteristic of timebox management?

A. Not suitable for prototyping or rapid application development (RAD)
B. Eliminates the need for a quality process
C. Prevents cost overruns and delivery delays
D. Separates system and user acceptance testing

Answer: C

Explanation:
Timebox management, by its nature, sets specific time and cost boundaries. It is very suitable for prototyping and RAD, and integrates system and user acceptance testing, but does not eliminate the need for a quality process.


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following should an IS auditor review to gain an understanding of the effectiveness of controls over the management of multiple projects?

A. Project database
B. Policy documents
C. Project portfolio database
D. Program organization

Answer: C

Explanation:
A project portfolio database is the basis for project portfolio management. It includes project data, such as owner, schedules, objectives, project type, status and cost. Project portfolio management requires specific project portfolio reports. A project database may contain the above for one specific project and updates to various parameters pertaining to the current status of that single project. Policy documents on project management set direction for the design, development, implementation and monitoring of the project. Program organization is the team required (steering committee, quality assurance, systems personnel, analyst, programmer, hardware support, etc.) to meet the delivery objective of the project.


QUESTION NO: 3
To minimize the cost of a software project, quality management techniques should be applied:

A. as close to their writing (i.e., point of origination) as possible.
B. primarily at project start-up to ensure that the project is established in accordance with
organizational governance standards.
C. continuously throughout the project with an emphasis on finding and fixing defects primarily during testing to maximize the defect detection rate.
D. mainly at project close-down to capture lessons learned that can be applied to future projects.

Answer: C

Practicetest CISA Isaca it-exams

Practicetest CISM Isaca it-exams

Practicetest CISM Isaca it-exams

CISM Certified Information Security Manager our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

QUESTION: 1
A common concern with poorly written web applications is that they can allow an attacker
to:

A. gain control through a buffer overflow.
B. conduct a distributed denial of service (DoS) attack.
C. abuse a race condition.
D. inject structured query language (SQL) statements.

Answer: D

Explanation:
Structured query language (SQL) injection is one of the most common and dangerous web application vulnerabilities. Buffer overflows and race conditions are very difficult to find and exploit on web applications. Distributed denial of service (DoS) attacks have nothing to do with the quality of a web application.

QUESTION: 2
Which of the following would be of GREATEST importance to the security manager in
determining whether to accept residual risk?

A. Historical cost of the asset
B. Acceptable level of potential business impacts
C. Cost versus benefit of additional mitigating controls
D. Annualized loss expectancy (ALE)

Answer: C

Explanation:
The security manager would be most concerned with whether residual risk would be reduced by a greater amount than the cost of adding additional controls. The other choices, although relevant, would not be as important.


QUESTION: 3
A project manager is developing a developer portal and requests that the security manager assign a public IP address so that it can be accessed by in-house staff and by external consultants outside the organization's local are network (LAN). What should the security manager do FIRST?

A. Understand the business requirements of the developer portal
B. Perform a vulnerability assessment of the developer portal
C. Install an intrusion detection system (IDS)
D. Obtain a signed nondisclosure agreement (NDA) from the external consultants before
allowing external access to the server

Answer: A

Explanation:
The information security manager cannot make an informed decision about the request
without first understanding the business requirements of the developer portal. Performing a vulnerability assessment of developer portal and installing an intrusion detection system
(IDS) are best practices but are subsequent to understanding the requirements. Obtaining a signed nondisclosure agreement will not take care of the risks inherent in the organization's application.


QUESTION: 4
A mission-critical system has been identified as having an administrative system account
with attributes that prevent locking and change of privileges and name. Which would be the BEST approach to prevent successful brute forcing of the account?
A. Prevent the system from being accessed remotely
B. Create a strong random password
C. Ask for a vendor patch
D. Track usage of the account by audit trails

Answer: B

Explanation:
Creating a strong random password reduces the risk of a successful brute force attack by
exponentially increasing the time required. Preventing the system from being accessed
remotely is not always an option in mission-critical systems and still leaves local access
risks. Vendor patches are not always available. Tracking usage is a detective control and will not prevent an attack.

Practicetest CISM Isaca it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM62_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM62_64 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C_TSCM62_64 SAP Certified Application Associate - Order Fulfillment with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest C_TSCM62_64 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
In which of the following circumstances can functions be controlled by the item category? Note:
There are 3 correct answers to this question.

A. If an item is relevant for billing.
B. If the availability check is performed.
C. If schedule line items are allowed.
D. If an item is relevant for rejection and a reason for rejection is assigned to it.
E. If an item is relevant for pricing.

Answer: A,C,E


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following document flows describes a possible standard sales process?

A. Inquiry - Delivery - Transfer order - Post goods issue - Invoice - Accounting document
B. Standard order with reference to an inquiry - Delivery - Transfer order - Post goods issue - Invoice - Accounting document
C. Quotation - Delivery - Transfer order - Post goods issue - Invoice - Accounting document
D. Release order with reference to a previous delivery - Delivery - Transfer order - Post goods issue - Invoice - Accounting document

Answer: B

QUESTION NO: 3
In which of the following ways can you use the document flow?

A. You can navigate directly to individual documents in change mode.
B. You can change any existing target documents without affecting the status in the source document.
C. You can review how documents and items of a sales process are linked.
D. You can reset the status of any document in order to redo the entire process.

Answer: C

Practicetest C_TSCM62_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest CBAP IIBA it-exams

Practicetest CBAP IIBA it-exams

CBAP Certified Business Analysis Professional™ (CBAP ® ) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest CBAP IIBA it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Marcy is the business analyst for her organization. She is completing the business analysis task of defining the business needs. She has the business goals and objectives and the requirements stated documentation. What must she confirm about the requirements stated documentation before defining the business need based on her analysis?

A. The requirements must reflect actual business requirements, not a description of the solutions.
B. The requirements must contain no or little risks.
C. The requirements must reflect proposed solutions as part of alternative identification.
D. The requirements must be compatible with the refinement of the business goals and objectives.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Bob and Susan are business analysts for their organization. They are examining two materials that could be used in an upcoming project. They are testing the materials and measuring the results of each test to compare the materials to each other. This process will help Bob and Susan determine which material is best for their upcoming project. What type of process are Bob and Susan completing with these materials?

A. Feasibility study
B. Stress test
C. Alternative identification
D. Benchmarking

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
You are the business analyst for your organization. You are working with several IT professionals to determine all of the connected systems in your organization. You are creating a mapping of the servers, workstations, printers, and other connected devices and their purposes for an analysis of how information is input, processed, stored, and output from each system. What business analysis process are you completing?

A. Networking topology mapping
B. Data dictionary and glossary creation
C. Data flow diagram
D. Prototype

Answer: C

Practicetest CBAP IIBA it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN52_65 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN52_65 SAP it-exams

C_TFIN52_65 SAP Certified Application Associate - Financial Accounting with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP5 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TFIN52_65 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
What are the benefits of using the accrual engine? (Choose three)

A. The accrual engine calculates the accrual amounts automatically.
B. The accrual engine supports parallel accounting.
C. The accrual engine can correct accruals in the previous month even if that period is closed.
D. The accrual engine is client-independent.
E. The accrual engine can simulate planned future accruals.

Answer: A,B,E


QUESTION NO: 2
When dealing with Financial Statement Versions (FSVs), how do you ensure that the requirements of the various target groups (for example auditors, tax authorities, and banks) are satisfied?

A. Create different FSVs based on the needs of the target group.
B. Create different versions of the same FSV.
C. Create one FSV and enhance it with different sets of notes.
D. Create one FSV, then save different variants based on the needs of the various groups.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
Your customer wants to use the Closing Cockpit for period end closing.
What major benefits of the Closing Cockpit do you highlight? (Choose two)

A. It closes the posting period automatically at the last day of the period.
B. It optimizes legacy data transfer.
C. It provides a complete documentation of the activities performed at period end closing.
D. It enables the use of a task list covering all closing activities.

Answer: C,D

Practicetest C_TFIN52_65 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM42_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM42_64 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C_TSCM42_64 SAP Certified Application Associate - Production - Planning & Manufacturing with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest C_TSCM42_64 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A new material with the following properties is to be recorded in SAP ECC. the material is kept in stock, is externally procured, and is used as a component in the bills of material for various final products. However, this material may not be purchased directly.
Which standard SAP material type would you use?

A. HAWA (trading good)
B. FERT (finished product)
C. NLAG (non-stock material)
D. ROH (raw material)

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following activities is necessary for the capacity availability check to be carried out automatically when a production order is released?

A. Activate the availability check and assign a checking rule to the work center for the operation to be checked.
B. Activate the availability check and assign the check control to the plant.
C. Activate the availability check and assign an overall profile in check control for the business function order release.
D. Activate the availability check and assign an availability checking group to the material master for the product to be produced.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
A customer has been using planning strategies 30 (production by lots) and 10 (anonymous maketo-stock production) in SAP ECC. The customer wishes to move in part to planning strategy 40(planning with final assembly). The issue of consumption has an effect here for the first time.
Which properties apply for consumption with planning strategy 40? (Choose two.)

A. Consumption can lead to an increase of the originally planned overall production quantity.
B. Consumption can result in the subsequent specification and adjustment of planning elements in terms of quantity and date, by means of customer orders that arrive.
C. Consumption can reduce the originally planned production quantity.
D. Consumption creates a static and binding assignment, between the planned independent requirements recorded in advance and the customer requirements that arrive, for the entire procurement process.
Answer: A,B

Practicetest C_TSCM42_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM52_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TSCM52_64 SAP it-exams

C_TSCM52_64 SAP Certified Application Associate - Procurement with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TSCM52_64 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
You create a purchase order for a foreign vendor. In what language are messages for this
purchase order printed?

A. In the language in which you are logged on to the system
B. In the language defined in the vendor master record
C. In the language of the purchase order header
D. In the language defined in the output determination Customizing settings

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which procurement element can be created in Purchasing with automatic purchase order
generation?

A. Delivery schedules
B. Contracts
C. Invoicing plans
D. Contract release orders

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
What characterizes an item category in purchasing? (Choose two.)

A. New item categories can be created in Customizing.
B. The item category contains a default value for the invoice receipt indicator in a purchase order item.
C. Any item category can be used in combination with any account assignment category in a purchase order.
D. The name of an item category can be changed in Customizing.

Answer: B,D

Practicetest C_TSCM52_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TERP10_65 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TERP10_65 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C_TERP10_65 SAP Certified - Associate Business Foundation & Integration with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP5 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest C_TERP10_65 SAP it-exams


1.Your organization uses SAP ERP powered by SAP NetWeaver.
Which of the following are subareas of the People Integration subcomponent of SAP
NetWeaver?(Choose three)
A. Enterprise Portal
B. Collaboration
C. Business Intelligence
D. Multi-Channel Access
E. Process Integration
F. Exchange Infrastructure

Answer: A,B,D


2.You are creating a query using the Query Designer, in SAP Business Intelligence. The Query Designer is divided into subareas.
Which of the following are subareas in the Query Designer?(Choose two)
A. Rows
B. Preview
C. Headings
D. Selection criteria

Answer: A,B


3.You are designing a query in SAP Business Intelligence. When you are viewing the query results, you want to be able to drill down by the characteristics product and product line.
To which subarea would you drag and drop these characteristics in the Query Designer?
A. Free characteristics
B. Filter
C. Rows
D. Columns

Answer: A

Practicetest C_TERP10_65 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN22_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN22_64 SAP it-exams

C_TFIN22_64 SAP Certified Application Associate - Management Accounting (CO) with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TFIN22_64 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Carryforward of the unused budget to the next fiscal year: Validate the following statements:
A. Commitments can also be carried forward.along with the budget carryforward.
B. You can carryforward unused budgets even if the order is in closed status or flagged for deletion.
C. You can return funds to the old fiscal year upto the amount of budget actually carried forward.
D. You can carry forward unused budgets to the next fiscal year
E. You can execute carryforward for more than once in a fiscal year. Each time the program carries forward only the budgets previously not carried forward.

Answer: C,D,E


QUESTION NO: 2
A budget profile needs to be assigned to the order type
A. False
B. True

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Budget Currencies: Validate the following statements.
A. Budget items are converted and saved automatically in Controlling Area Current and the Object currency.
B. If you use budgeting in controlling area currency then only Controlling area currency can be used for budgeting.
C. Object currency is stored in the Master Data of the object
D. You can chose different currencies to enter you budget.
E. If you chose Object currency then only Object currency will be used for budgeting.
F. in R/3 system the availability control function is available for all currencies.
G. You should chose in the budget profile of the order type or the project profile in which currency the budget items for the order would be entered.

Answer: A,B,C,D,E,G

Practicetest C_TFIN22_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN52_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TFIN52_64 SAP it-exams
C_TFIN52_64 SAP Certified Application Associate - Financial Accounting with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TFIN52_64 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
There are different ways of posting retirements:
A. With or without revenue (scrapping)
B. As full or partial retirement
C. With or without customer
D. As mass retirement
E. As retirement of several assets
F. With or without vendor (non-integrated)

Answer: A,B,C,D,E


QUESTION NO: 2
Important ALV functions
A. Its user-friendly characteristics support the dynamic creation of layouts.
B. There is a new graphical design, which makes it even simpler to process and display lists and reports using the List Viewer grid control.

Answer: A,B


QUESTION NO: 3
Establish the dimensions that can be used in the definition of validations, substitutions, and rules
A. Boolean classes or boolean classes or boolean class

Answer: A

Practicetest C_TFIN52_64 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TAW12_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TAW12_70 SAP it-exams

C_TAW12_70 SAP Certified Development Associate - ABAP with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TAW12_70 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A commit work is issued in a transaction that employs asynchronous updating, what kes place.(More than one answer is correct)
A. SAP LUW is concluded
B. User is notified of updates
C. Update requests are processed
D. Dabase commit is triggered

Answer: A,C,D


QUESTION NO: 2
In what case are bstrips good candidates?
(More than one answer is correct)
A. When Users need the ability to navigate freely between components
B. When Navigation between components is predetermined in a fixed manner
C. When several components of an application need to be displayed on one screen

Answer: A,C


QUESTION NO: 3
What technique is used to ensure remote functions are still processed even if the partner
computer is not active?
A. Asynchronous RFC
B. Synchronous RFC
C. Transactional RFC

Answer: C

Practicetest C_TAW12_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TB1200_88 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TB1200_88 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C_TB1200_88 SAP CERTIFIED APPLICATION ASSOCIATE - SAP BUSINESS ONE 8.8 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest C_TB1200_88 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
The implementation consultant has added 20 user-defined fields to the header area of various marketing documents. However, the client lead is confused because she sees all the fields every time she opens a new sales order. She only wants to see the fields for the document she is working on. What can the consultant suggest to help?
A. The client lead can sort user-defined fields, so that the fields required for the currently opened
document appear first. This only affects the current user.
B. Using Form Settings, user-defined fields that are not relevant for a document can be hidden
from the document, just like ordinary fields.
C. Using authorization groups, assign relevant user-defined fields to the client lead. All nonassigned fields will be hidden in the display.
D. Organize the user-defined fields into categories. The client lead can then select the category that applies to the marketing document she is viewing.
Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
You have been doing business with a vendor, ZZ Supplies, for over a year. Now the vendor asks to place an order as a customer. What do you need to do to create the sales order properly?
A. Because this sales order is an exception, use the 'A/R Invoice + Payment' transaction to enter the sales order in the account for one-time customers.
B. Enter the sales order as a customer sales order with the vendor business partner number entered in the customer code field.
C. Change the business partner type of the vendor to 'Customer', enter the sales order, and then change the business partner type back to 'Vendor'.
D. Create a new customer master record and enter this new customer code in the sales order.
Answer: D

Practicetest C_TB1200_88 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TBW45_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TBW45_70 SAP it-exams
C_TBW45_70 SAP Certified Application Associate - Business Intelligence with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TBW45_70 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Your customer needs a way to make the Integrated Planning more flexible. You have suggested using variables. Which of the following comments regarding variables are correct? (Choose three)

A. They parameterize characteristic values in filters, queries, functions, characteristic
relationships, and data slices.
B. Variables created in filters can also be used in queries. Therefore, they are shareable objects, and result in less configuration.
C. A selling point of variables used in data slices and characteristic relationships is that they 'popup'.
This allows the user to make their own derivation or data lock selections.
D. Users can personalize their variable values and save them as variants.

Answer: A,B,D



QUESTION NO: 2
In your planning project you have a basic InfoCube containing the actual data and a Real Time InfoCube containing the plan data. You want to use actual and plan data at the same time in your Integrated Planning scenario. Which of the following statements are correct? (Choose two)

A. You can create an aggregation level on the Real Time InfoCube and combine it with the actual InfoCube in a MultiProvider. On the MultiProvider you can create a planning function that copies the actual data to the plan InfoCube.
B. You can include the actual InfoCube and the plan InfoCube in a MultiProvider, create an aggregation level on the MultiProvider, and create a distribution function that distributes plan data according to the actual data.
C. You can create an aggregation level on the Real Time InfoCube and combine it with the actual InfoCube in a MultiProvider. On the MultiProvider you can create a plan query that shows actual and plan data.
D. Since only Real Time InfoCubes can be used in Integrated Planning, you must use a Data Transfer Process to move your actual data to the Real Time InfoCube. Then you plan on the Real Time InfoCube.

Answer: B,C

Practicetest C_TBW45_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest BI0-135 COGNOS it-exams

Practicetest BI0-135 COGNOS it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

BI0-135 IBM Cognos 8 BI OLAP Developer our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest BI0-135 COGNOS it-exams


Question: 1
The developer received a file lock error when attempting to overwrite a published PowerCube.
Which services must be stopped to be able to overwrite a published Powercube?
A. Report and Report batch services.
B. Cognos 8 and Delivery services.
C. Dispatcher and Presentation services.
D. Content Manager and Monitor services.
Answer: A


Question: 2
At the beginning of the fiscal year, the Camping Equipment product line reduced the number of products that are being sold. What can be done to remove the inactive categories that are no longer needed in the model?
A. Set the level inclusion to suppress categories that are not needed.
B. Incrementally update the Powercube.
C. Prevent the automatic generation of new categories.
D. Generate the categories.
Answer: A


Question: 3
what does the developer specify when creating a test build that uses a subset of the source data?
A. The number of categories.
B. The dimensions to include in the cube.
C. The number of records.
D. The measures to include in the cube.
Answer: C

Practicetest BI0-135 COGNOS it-exams

Practicetest C_EPMBPC_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_EPMBPC_70 SAP it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

C_EPMBPC_70 IBM SAP 8 BI OLAP Developer our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest C_EPMBPC_70 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
How do you allow data entry and posting in a BPC Excel sheet?
A. Add a row to show the variance of the plan.
B. Use a hierarchical structure for member values.
C. Set the workbook option to 'Refresh automatically'.
D. Use base members.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
What is displayed in an EVDRE report when 'Account1, Account2' is in the PageKeyRange, with entity in the rows and time in columns?
A. Aggregated data for Account1 and Account2
B. All Accounts other than Account1 and Account2
C. Account1 and Account2 in separate rows
D. Account1 and Account2 in separate columns

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
You want to format your account members dynamically in an EVDRE report.
In which column do you have to enter the value 'NUMBERFORMAT=ACCOUNT.FORMAT'?
A. PARAMETERS
B. CRITERIA
C. FORMAT
D. USE

Answer: D

Practicetest C_EPMBPC_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TADM51_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TADM51_70 SAP it-exams

C_TADM51_70 System Administration (Oracle DB) with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TADM51_70 SAP it-exams


66.Which customer specific files must be saved during an online database backup to be able to restore the Oracle database to a consistent state?
A. The Oracle executables, database parameter file, and the tablespace data files.
B. The Oracle online redo log files and the database control file.
C. The archived log files, database control file and the Oracle executables.
D. The tablespace data files, database control file, and all database redo logs written during the
online backup.
E. The tablespace data files, database control file, and the database parameter file.

Answer: D


1.The physical separation of database logs from their mirror copies means?
A. Using physically separate partitions of a physical disk.
B. Using physically separate disks.
C. Using physically separate disks in the same logical device group.
D. Using generic database utilities to split the flow of data between randomly chosen operating
system directories.
E. Use of database specific utilities to fork log backups to 2 physically separate backup media.

Answer: B


2.In SAP system with Oracle, special operating system users created during the installation have
privileges for administration and maintenance of the Oracle database.
A. True
B. False

Answer: A


3.What action needs to be taken when Oracle returns an ORA-1 653 error, failure to allocate an extent for a table n a specific tablespace?
A. The tablespace should be moved to a faster disk so that Oracle can find the extents quicker.
B. The tablespace size should be increased by adding I or more datafiles.
C. This is an Oracle internal error message which should be registered with Oracle immediately.
D. The database must be shutdown immediately to avoid damage.
E. The affected table should be dropped to avoid similar problems in the future.

Answer: B

Practicetest C_TADM51_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TADM53_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest C_TADM53_70 SAP it-exams

C_TADM53_70 SAP Certified Technology Associate - System Administration (MS SQL DB) with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest C_TADM53_70 SAP it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
For which of the following options do you need to install and configure SAProuter? (Choose two)

A. EarlyWatch session done remotely by an employee of SAP
B. Create a support message in case of problems with the SAP system
C. Remote Consulting from SAP
D. Connection to http://help.sap.com.

Answer: A,C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following are existing variants of SAP GUI? (Choose three)

A. SAP GUI for Linux
B. SAP GUI for Windows
C. SAP GUI for Java
D. SAP GUI for HTML

Answer: B,C,D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which statement regarding front end printing with SAP NetWeaver AS ABAP is correct?

A. It is not possible to configure an output device for front end printing with SAP GUI for Java.
B. If you want to configure an output device for front end printing with SAP GUI for Windows, you should choose access method G.
C. If you want to configure an output for front end printing with SAP GUI for HTML, you have to choose access method G.

Answer: B

Practicetest C_TADM53_70 SAP it-exams

Practicetest BH0-012 ISEB it-exams

Practicetest BH0-012 ISEB it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

BH0-012 The Foundation–ITIL (2012 Onwards) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest BH0-012 ISEB it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
The BEST description of an incident is:

A. An unplanned disruption of service unless there is a backup to that service
B. An unplanned interruption to service or a reduction in the quality of service
C. Any disruption to service whether planned or unplanned
D. Any disruption to service that is reported to the service desk, regardless of whether the service is impacted or not

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which one of the following is the CORRECT set of steps for the continual service improvement approach?

A. Devise a strategy; Design the solution; Transition into production; Operate the solution;
Continually improve
B. Where do we want to be?; How do we get there?; How do we check we arrived?; How do we keep the momentum going?
C. Identify the required business outcomes; Plan how to achieve the outcomes; Implement the plan; Check the plan has been properly implemented; Improve the solution
D. What is the vision?; Where are we now?; Where do we want to be?; How do we get there?; Did we get there?; How do we keep the momentum going?

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
When can a known error record be raised?
1. At any time it would be useful to do so
2. After a workaround has been found

A. 2 only
B. 1 only
C. Neither of the above
D. Both of the above

Answer: D

Practicetest BH0-012 ISEB it-exams

Sonntag, 6. Januar 2013

Mein Freund, ich liebe dich..

Mein Freund, ich liebe dich. :)

Urlaub ist gegen Ende.

Urlaub ist gegen Ende. Traurig.

Practicetest BH0-010 ISTQB it-exams

Practicetest BH0-010 ISTQB it-exams

BH0-010 STQB - ISEB Certified Tester Foundation Level (2010 Syllibus) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest BH0-010 ISTQB it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which of the following statements is true?

A. A test condition specifies input values and expected results; a test case combines one or more
test conditions
B. A test condition may be derived from requirements or specifications; a test procedure specifies
the sequence of action for the execution of a test
C. A test case specifies the sequence of execution of test conditions; a test procedure specifies
test pre-conditions and post-conditions
D. A test case specifies input values and expected results; a test procedure may be derived
from requirements or specifications

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
Which two of the following are common attributes of maintenance testing?

a) It is carried out to ensure that the system will be reliable once in service.
b) It includes regression testing.
c) It requires the use of fully defined specifications.
d) It can include testing of a system after migration from one platform to another.

A. a and b
B. a and c
C. c and d
D. b and d

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
You have designed test cases to provide 100% statement and 100% decision coverage for the following



How many MORE test cases are required?

A. One more test case will be required for 100 % decision coverage
B. Two more test cases will be required for 100 % statement coverage, one of which will be used
to provide 100% decision coverage
C. None, existing test cases can be used
D. One more test case will be required for 100% statement coverage

Answer: C



QUESTION 4
Which of the following is MOST likely to be an objective of a pilot project to introduce a test tool?

A. To assess if the test tool brings benefits at reasonable cost
B. To ensure that developers will use the test tool
C. To ensure that the time spent testing and the cost of testing is reduced
D. To assess if everyone in theorganisation can be trained prior to roll-out

Answer: A

Practicetest BH0-010 ISTQB it-exams

Schoenes Wochenende!!

Schoenes Wochenende!! Frohlich..

Practicetest BCP-211 BlackBerry it-exams

Practicetest BCP-211 BlackBerry it-exams

BCP-211 Supporting BlackBerry Devices in an Enterprise Environment our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest BCP-211 BlackBerry it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
.A BlackBerry device user is trying to upgrade her version of BlackBerry Device Software and wants to verify that the latest version of BlackBerry Device Software has been installed on her computer. Which two methods will help determine what version of BlackBerry Device Software is currently installed on the computer? (Choose two.)

A. Open Add or Remove Programs > Select the BlackBerry Device Software
for the BlackBerry device model > Select Click here for Support Information
B. Open Microsoft Windows Device Manager > Expand RIM Device > Right-click on BlackBerry Device > Select Properties
C. Launch BlackBerry Desktop Manager > Select Help > SelectAbout Desktop Manager > Select the Device Software tab
D. Run GETBBVERSION.EXE from the command prompt
E. Open DEVICEINFO.INI from C.\Program files\ ResearchIn Motion\BlackBerry

Answer: A,C


QUESTION NO: 2
.When the BlackBerry Smart Card Reader is in a pairing state, it displays the reader ID and the LED displays as which of the following? (Choose one.)

A. Flashing blue
B. Solid blue
C. Flashing green
D. Solid green
E. Flashing red
F. Solid red

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
.While a BlackBerry device user is attempting to synchronize data files, the following error
message is displayed. Online connection to your mail server is unavailable Which two actions will best resolve this error? (Choose two.)

A. Confirm that the BlackBerry device user has a valid connection to his work network.
B. Perform a cleanuninstall of BlackBerry Desktop Manager and upgrade to the latest version.
C. Confirm that the BlackBerry device is connected to BlackBerry Desktop Manager.
D. Check if the BlackBerry device user is able to send and receive email messages.
E. Contact the administrator of the BlackBerry device users messaging server to verify that services are functioning as expected.

Answer: A,E

Practicetest BCP-211 BlackBerry it-exams

Practicetest adwords-search Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-search Google it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

adwords-search GoogleSearch Advertising Advanced Exam Practice Test our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest adwords-search Google it-exams


Q1. Which of the bidding strategies will you use if you are focused on clicks?

A. CPA bidding
B. CPM bidding
C. Automatic CPC bidding
D. Campaigns

Answer: C


Q2. Which of the following policies prohibits advertising if the business model is deemed unacceptable according to AdWords Terms and Conditions?

A. Link policies
B. Content policies
C. Quality policies
D. Editorial and format policies

Answer: B


Q3. Which of the following terms refers to the amount of time it takes for a user to view the landing page after clicking an ad?

A. Load time
B. Click-through rate
C. ROI
D. Quality score

Answer: A

Practicetest adwords-search Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-reporting Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-reporting Google it-exams

adwords-reporting Google Reporting and Analysis Exam Practice Test our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest adwords-reporting Google it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
When you begin to work with the Google Website Optimizer there are two essential pages you need to
identify. What are the two pages?
A. Landing page and conversion page
B. Landing page and conversion page
C. Test page and live page
D. Test page and conversion page
Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
There are three primary goals for reporting and reviewing reports in Google Analytics according to Google.
Which of the following is NOT a primary goal of using Google Analytics?
A. Driving valuable traffic
B. Maximizing conversions of your website
C. Increasing web revenue
D. Decreasing unnecessary costs
Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
You have a website that informs readers about your business, offers a newsletter signup form, allows
readers to purchase software online, and includes a "contact us" form so visitors can ask for more
information. Which conversion tracking purpose would be most appropriateyou’re your web page "contact
us" if you wanted to track statistics?
A. View of a key page
B. Other
C. Leads
D. Sign-ups
Answer: C

Practicetest adwords-reporting Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-display Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-display Google it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

adwords-display Google Display Exam Practice Test our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest adwords-display Google it-exams


QUESTION 1
Nancy would like to create a display ad for the Google Content Network, but she doesn't have
image-editing software. Which of the following is the recommended for Nancy to create a display ad for the Google Content Network?

A. Use the Display Ad Builder.
B. Hire a designer to create the display ad.
C. Use the Adobe Ad Builder.
D. Use a text ad.

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
Why is it important for a Google AdWords ad on the Google Content Network to be marked as
Family Safe?

A. So that the ad would not be blocked by Google and Yahoo
B. To reduce the cost per click
C. Many Google Content Network partners only accept family safe ads
D. So that the images can show in search results

Answer: C



QUESTION 3
Andy is a consultant to a business that wants to advertise in the Google Content Network. He
recommends that the business owner use the contextual targeting for his ads. What is the
contextual targeting?

A. The contextual targeting allows the business owner to target specific languages.
B. The contextual targeting allows the business owner to target specific demographics.
C. The contextual targeting allows the business owner to select keywords related to the products
for sale so his ads will show on related Websites.
D. The contextual targeting allows the business owner to insert ads into a series of related We bsites.

Answer: C

Practicetest adwords-display Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-fundamentals Google it-exams

Practicetest adwords-fundamentals Google it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

adwords-fundamentals Google Search Fundamentals Exam Practice Test our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest adwords-fundamentals Google it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have a client that has reviewed a recent performance report you've supplied. The client wants to make several changes to the Google AdWords campaign. When can the changes be implemented?

A. On any day other than the day a billing cycle ends or starts
B. Any time outside of three days of a new billing cycle
C. Within seven days of a new billing cycle
D. Any time

Answer: D


QUESTION 2
Consider an advertiser that is trying to sell more coffee beans. The advertiser has identified keywords for the ad groups: gourmet coffee beans, organic coffee beans, and French roast beans.
Which keyword wouldn't be a good choice to include in the ad group gourmet coffee beans?

A. Gourmet coffee
B. French roast coffee beans
C. Specialty coffee
D. Gourmet coffee beans

Answer: B  


QUESTION 3
Jan creates a Google AdWords ad for her company. She wants to avoid showing her ad when users search for free, cheap, or crack. How can she do this with a keyword match type?

A. Jan will need to a broad match, but add the negative qualifier for each keyword she doesn't wantherad associated with.
B. Jan will need to create a negative match for the searched phrase that includes free, cheap, orrack.
C. Jan can only do this if she creates an exact match, in quotes, for every approved keyword.
D. Jan will need to create an exact match for the phrases she will allow her ad to be displayed with.

Answer: B

Practicetest adwords-fundamentals Google it-exams

Practicetest A00-281 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-281 SAS it-exams

A00-281 SAS Certified Clinical Trials Programmer Using SAS 9 Accelerated Version our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest A00-281 SAS it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which CDISC standard is concerned with the development of simplified case report forms?
A. Clinical Data Acquisition Standards Harmonization (CDASH)
B. Operational Data Model (ODM)
C. Study Data Tabulation Model (SDTM)
D. Trial Design Model (TDM)

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
The purpose of the ADaM model is to provide a framework that:
A. enables the tabulation of the raw source data
B. enables the creation of study patient profiles
C. enables the statistical analysis of the data
D. can be used to generate the CDISC ODM

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Where would you store a value collected on a case report form but not defined in an SDTM domain?
A. RELREC
B. DM
C. SUPPQUAL
D. SC

Answer: C

Practicetest A00-281 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-260 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-260 SAS it-exams

A00-260 SAS Data Integration Development our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest A00-260 SAS it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A SAS administrator has performed the "Clear Projects" action to remove the lock on a SAS Data Integration Studio job called "Create Tables" that some user has checked out in their project repository. What will be the outcome of this action on the user's project repository?

A. It will become empty and all new and checked out metadata objects will revert to the not checked out state.
B. It will only contain the new metadata objects. All checked out metadata objects will revert to the not checked out state.
C. It will become empty and the DI job called "Create Tables" will no longer be in a checked out state.
D. It will become empty and will not be accessible until the administrator grants permissions for it to be used again.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which statement best describes the DataFlux Integration Server?

A. An application server that executes service requests based on Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) to call dfPower Architect or dfPower Profile jobs.
B. A plug-in to SAS Data Integration Studio allowing you to design jobs specialized for data cleansing operations.
C. An application interface that allows you to builddfPower Architect and dfPower Profile jobs specialized for data cleansing operations.
D. A third party server defined in the SAS metadata repository that allows you to build flows integrating multiple jobs and establishing job dependencies within the flow.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
The purpose of change management in SAS Data Integration Studio is to manage:

A. metadata objects across metadata servers
B. metadata objects within a logged on user's personal folder
C. metadata objects within a metadata server
D. metadata objects within a logged on user's Checkouts Tree

Answer: C


Practicetest A00-260 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-250 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-250 SAS it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

A00-250 SAS Platform Administration for SAS9 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest A00-250 SAS it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A platform administrator used operating system commands to backup the metadata repositories and repository manager in a SAS environment. When the platform administrator attempted to restore the SAS environment, the backup files were unusable. What is the most likely cause of the backup files being unusable?

A. The metadata server was stopped when the backup was taken.
B. The metadata server was Online when the backup was taken.
C. The metadata server was only paused to an Offline state when the backup was taken.
D. The metadata server configuration file omaconfig.xml is not included in a backup initiated by operating system commands.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
A platform administrator needs to restore backup files to a running metadata server. Which macro can the platform administrator use to perform this task?

A. OMAREORG
B. OMARESTORE
C. OMACONFIG
D. OMABAKUP

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
The metadata server is stopped. What will be the result when operating system commands are used to backup the metadata repositories and repository manager?

A. The backup files will be unusable.
B. The backup files will not include metadata configuration files.
C. The backup files should be usable for a restore.
D. The backup files will include metadata configuration files only.

Answer: C

Practicetest A00-250 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-212 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-212 SAS it-exams

A00-212 SAS Advanced Programming Exam for SAS 9 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest A00-212 SAS it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which one of the following statements is true?

A. The WHERE statement can be executed conditionally as part of an IF statement.
B. The WHERE statement selects observations before they are brought into the PDV.
C. The subsetting IF statement works on observations before they are read into the PDV.
D. The WHERE and subsetting IF statements can be used interchangeably in all SAS programs.

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
The variable attributes of SAS data sets ONE and TWO are shown below:
ONE TWO
# Variable Type Len Pos # Variable Type Len Pos 2 sales Num 8 8 2 budget Num 8 8
1 year Num 8 0 3 sales Char 8 16
1 year Num 8 0
Data set ONE contains 100 observations. Data set TWO contains 50 observations. Both data sets are sorted by the variable YEAR.
The following SAS program is submitted:
data three;
merge one two;
by year;
run;
Which one of the following is the result of the program execution?

A. No messages are written to the SAS log.
B. ERROR and WARNING messages are written to the SAS log.
C. Data set THREE is created with two variables and 50 observations.
D. Data set THREE is created with three variables and 100 observations.

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
Given the following SAS statement:

%let idcode = Prod567;
Which one of the following statements stores the value 567 in the macro variable CODENUM?

A. %let codenum = substr(&idcode,length(&idcode)-2);
B. %let codenum = substr(&idcode,length(&idcode)-3);
C. %let codenum = %substr(&idcode,%length(&idcode)-2);
D. %let codenum = %substr(&idcode,%length(&idcode)-3);

Answer: C

Practicetest A00-212 SAS it-exams

Practicetest 3600 Avaya it-exams

Practicetest 3600 Avaya it-exams

3600 Avaya Ethernet Routing Switch Implementation and Maintenance Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 3600 Avaya it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
With release 4.0 or higher software on the Ethernet routing switch (ERS) 8300, an advanced routing license is required to enable certain features.
Which two statements ant true about the Advanced Routing License process and supported features for the ERS 8300? (Choose two.)

A. the Advanced Routing License supports QoS, SMLT, VRRP and OSPF
B. the Advanced Routing License supports SMLT, VRRP, OSPF, PIM-SM. and SLPP
C. To protect against security breaches, the ERS 8300 allows only a primary path for the license file
D. To protect against system flash failure, the ERS 8300 allows a primary, secondary, and tertiary path for the license file.

Answer: B,D


QUESTION NO: 2
Consider the fallowing port conditions on an Ethernet Routing Switch (ERS) 8648GTRS
10/100/1000 Ethernet I/O module left LED -green Right LED - flashing green.
What is the status of the port?

A. The link speed is 100 Mbps. and the port is disabled.
B. The link speed is 1000 Mbps, and the port is disabled
C. The link speed is 100 Mbps. and the port is passing traffic.
D. The link speed is 1000 Mbps. and the port is passing traffic.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
A network has some Ethernet Routing Switch (ERS) 5500 switches licensed at the advanced level for Release 6 2 A technician implementing Protocol independent Multicast - Sparse Mode (PIMSM)
Which licensing requirement applies?

A. the PIM-SM is already covered by the existing advanced feature license
B. the PIM-SM con only be licensed on ERS 5510 models
C. the PIM-SM is included m the base license with release 6.2
D. A Premier license is needed

Answer: C

Practicetest 3600 Avaya it-exams

Practicetest A00-211 SAS it-exams

Practicetest A00-211 SAS it-exams

A00-211 SAS Base Programming for SAS 9 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest A00-211 SAS it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
What is the purpose or the MISSOVER option on the INFILE statement?

A. It prevents SAS from loading a new record when the end of the current record is reached.
B. It enables SAS to scan the input data records until the character string that is specified in the@‘character-string’ expression is round.
C. It enables SAS to continue to read the next input data record if it does not find values in the current input tine for all the variables in the statement.
D. It causes the DATA step to stop processing if an INPUT statement reaches the end of the current record without finding values for all variables in the statement.

Answer: A



QUESTION NO: 2
The following SAS program is submitted:
data work.test;
set work.staff (keep = jansales febsales marsales);
array diff_sales{3} difsales1 - difsales3;
array monthly{3} jansales febsales marsales;
run;
What new variables are created?

A. JANSALES, FEBSALES and MARSALES
B. MONTHLY1, MONTHLY2 and MONTHLY3
C. DIFSALES1, DIFSALES2 and DIFSALES3
D. DIFF_SALES1, DIFF_SALES2 and DIFF_SALES3

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
What describes the SAS automatic _ERRDR_ variable?

A. The _ERROR_ variable contains the values ‘TRUE’ or ‘FALSE.’
B. The _ERROR variable maintains a count of the number of data errors.
C. The _ERROR_ variable can be used in expressions or calculations in the DATA step.
D. The ERROR_variable contains the number or the observation that caused the error.

Answer: C

Practicetest A00-211 SAS it-exams

Practicetest 650-987 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-987 Cisco it-exams

650-987 Cisco Data Center Unified Computing Sales Specialist Exam for SE our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-987 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
How would you respond to an objection that a Cisco Unified Computing System solution is expensive and may not have a good ROI?

A. Competitive solutions use less physical cabling and thus have less redundancy.
B. Cisco UCS C-Series servers offer a cost-effective solution where customers buy only what they need, reducing upfront costs while offering integration possibilities in the future.
C. Cisco UCS C-Series servers allow easy integration with your existing server implementation by supporting legacy hardware such as RISC processors.
D. Cisco UCS C-Series servers reduce long-term TCO by storing excessive power in onboard batteries.

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
With the Cisco UCS C-Series Servers, users experience a cost-effective solution, where they buy only what they need.
There is no need for addictional expenses and the upfront cost is reduced, while still offering integration possibilities in the future.


QUESTION 2
In a Cisco Unified Computing solution, which two actions are the easiest ways to increase connectivity throughput? (Choose two.)

A. Add additional Cisco UCS 6100 Fabric Interconnect switches to the Cisco UCS cluster.
B. Move some servers into a separate Cisco UCS cluster.
C. Add additional servers in the Cisco UCS cluster.
D. Use additional uplinks on a Cisco UCS 2104XP I/O module.
E. Use two Cisco UCS 2104XP I/O modules per chassis.

Answer: DE

Explanation/Reference:
Each IOM provides eight internal backplane ports, four external fabric ports, and one internal management network. An individual IOM is connected via a physical fabric port to the fabric interconnects server port, and via a logical backplane port through the chassis midplane to each individual server blade.


QUESTION 3
The Intelligent Network can play a vital role in which three networking environments? (Choose three)

A. storage networking
B. application networking
C. data networking
D. wide-area networking
E. security networking
F. media networking

Answer: ABC

Practicetest 650-987 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-568 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-568 Cisco it-exams


650-568 Cisco Web Security Field Engineer Specialist our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-568 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which of these user ICAP?

A. anti-malware scanning
B. data loss prevention polices
C. decryption policies
D. CiscoIronPort Data Security policies

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
When do you need to configure the P1 interface?

A. whenever you have an upstream proxy
B. whenever you intend to deploy the L4TM in blocking mode
C. whenever you want to enable the WSA proxy
D. whenever you have a separate management VLAN orsubnetwork

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of these is a drawback in using McAfee heuristic scanning?

A. heuristic scanning cannot detect new malware with an unknown signature
B. heuristic scanning requires a separate license key
C. heuristic scanning increases the probability of false positives
D. heuristic scanning increases the probability of false negatives

Answer: C

Practicetest 650-568 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-667 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-667 Cisco it-exams

650-667 Cisco SP Video Cable Access Networks Design Specialist for SE our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-667 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
What is the main difference between a video program in an ASI format versus a SDI format?

A. ASI contains only i program, SOI can contain multiple
B. ASI is a compressed format where SDI is uncompressed
C. ASI is over coax, SDI is not
D. SDI has audio channels

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following layers is the first layer in contribution solution architecture?

A. Optical network layer
B. The IP/MPLS core
C. The video adaptation layer
D. Customer Premises Layer

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
What is the primary advantage of MPEG-4 part 10 over MPEG-2?

A. MPEG 4 uses twice the bandwidth
B. MPEG 2 can have more programs
C. MPEG 2 can have less programs
D. MPEG 4 part 10 uses half the bandwidth

Answer: D

Practicetest 650-667 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-378 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-378 Cisco it-exams


650-378 ABNFEE Advanced Borderless Network Field Engineer Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-378 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
What is a powerful and flexible subsystem in Cisco IOS Software that provides real-time network event detection and onboard automation?

A. Cisco IOS EEM
B. Cisco IPS
C. Cisco Security Agent
D. Cisco ASA 5500 Series

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
What is a feature of Cisco Medianet?

A. It automates device configuration and registration.
B. It disables device asset tracking.
C. It allows manual configuration with SmartPorts.
D. It deploys complex access-switch QoS.

Answer: A

QUESTION NO: 3
What are the components of the Cisco Unified Wireless Network?

A. access points, wireless LAN controllers, Cisco Wireless Control System
B. access points, WAAS Express, Cisco Wireless Control System
C. Air Quality Index charts, wireless LAN controllers, Cisco Wireless Control System
D. access points, wireless LAN controllers, Cisco IronPort S-Series Web Security Appliance

Answer: A

Practicetest 650-378 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-195 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-195 Cisco it-exams

650-195 SMBEN - SMB Solutions for Engineers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-195 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which combination of ports is available on the Cisco SPA 8800 voice gateway?
A. one station port and one trunk port (1xFXS and 1xFXO)
B. four station ports and four trunk ports (4xFXR and 4xFXO)
C. eight station ports (8xFXS)
D. two station ports (2xFXS)

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
What three features that are included with the purchase of a Cisco SA 520? (choose three)
A. ProtectLink Gateway
B. DMZ
C. business-grade firewall
D. VPN capabilities
E. Cisco Intrusion Prevention System
F. Cisco Small Business Pro Service

Answer: BCD


QUESTION 3
Which three are components of the Cisco SMARTnet service? (Choose three.)
A. cases opened via e-mail or telephone at any time.
B. NBD callback from specialized engineers during regular business hours
C. advanced replacement on the next business day
D. Support for every Cisco product
E. support for low-end products only
F. immediate support from the Cisco TAC engineers

Answer: ACF

Practicetest 650-195 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-196 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-196 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

650-196 SMB Solutions for Engineers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 650-196 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which two options are competitive advantages of Cisco RV Series Routers? (Choose two.)

A. provide a port to connect a fax machine
B. easy-to-use simplified configuration GUI
C. enhanced features: VLANs, ACL, QoS, IPv6, and cloud services (some models)
D. embedded wireless included with all routers
E. ProtectLink Web included with all routers

Answer: C,E


QUESTION NO: 2
Which two options are requirements of a Cisco Catalyst switch customer? (Choose two.)

A. easy-to-use graphical user interfaces
B. price conscious
C. readiness to invest
D. Small Business Support Center support
E. multiple management options

Answer: A,E


QUESTION NO: 3
Which three options are characteristics of Cisco RV Series Routers? (Choose three.)

A. Browser-based configuration
B. Hosted security
C. Integrated voice mail
D. Survivable remote site telephony
E. Virtual private network connectivity
F. Wired and wireless versions

Answer: A,E,F

Practicetest 650-196 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-179 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-179 Cisco it-exams

650-179 SMB Solutions for Account Managers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-179 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which two competitive voice advantages does the Cisco Unified Communications 300 Series have over typical key system solutions?

A. call conferencing
B. integrated wireless
C. programmable soft keys
D. speed dial and caller ID
E. voice mail to email notification
Answer: B,E


QUESTION NO: 2
What it the best way to get Cisco OnPlus up and running for a customer?

A. Set up user licenses.
B. Install the software.
C. Plug into a switch port.
D. Set up a dedicated PC

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Cisco Business Edition 3000 supports a centralized call processing deployment model, which means that one system can support a company central site and several remote sites, including the central sites can be supported?

A. 5
B. 9
C. 10
D. 15

Answer: C

Practicetest 650-179 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-177 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-177 Cisco it-exams

650-177 SMB Solutions for Account Managers our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-177 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1

Which three deployment scenarios does Cisco Configuration Assistant Support? (choose three)
A. Cisco SR500 in secure router mode, acting as a front end for Cisco Unified Communications 500
B. Cisco SR 500teleworker with Cisco Unified Communications 500 as VPN server
C. multi-site VPN with Cisco Unified Communications 500 platforms
D. centralized Cisco Unified Communications Manager VE with Cisco Unified Communications500 in SRST mode
E. redundant Cisco Unified Communications 500 with primary-to-backup failover
F. Cisco Unified Communications 500 to Cisco Unified Communications Manager SIP trunk

Answer: A,C,F


QUESTION NO: 2

What are three ways in which wireless is cost-effective? (Choose three.)
A. Save time and money by avoiding labor-intensive moves,adds, and changes
B. Less expensive to purchase and maintain
C. Reduce monthly Internet access costs over wired installation
D. Enable your friends to access the Internet while waiting for you
E. allow employees to be mobile and increase their productivity
F. save in cabling costs for new or unwired buildings

Answer: A,E,F


QUESTION NO: 3

What are two benefits of clustered access points on a small business network using the Cisco 500 Series Access Point? (Choose two.)
A. Rouge AP integration
B. Tri-band 11g single radios
C. Secure guest access
D. Single view to deploy and manage
E. Cisco IOS configuration

Answer: C,D

Practicetest 650-177 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-148 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-148 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

650-148 ISSE Cisco IronPort Sales Specialist - Email our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 650-148 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
You have enabled LDAP to search a Microsoft 2003 AD server for valid mail addresses, which of the following two is a valid accept query? (Choose two.)

A. (|(Mail={a)(Proxyaddresses=smtp:fa}))
B. Maillocaladdress= smtp:{a}
C. (Proxyaddresses=smtp:{a})
D. Mailroutingaddress={a}
E. (Proxyaddresses={a})

Answer: C,D


QUESTION NO: 2
Which format must the x509 certificate be in for installing on an ESA?

A. PKCS
B. CRT
C. PEM
D. X500
E. CER

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
How would you configure the Recipient Access Table to accept all subdomains and the root domain mydomain.com?

A. Two entries: mydomain.com and '.mydomain.com
B. One entry: 'mydomain.com
C. One entry: mydomain.com
D. Two entries: mydomain.com and .mydomain.com

Answer: D

Practicetest 650-148 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-153 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 650-153 Cisco it-exams

650-153 ESFE Cisco Email Security Field Engineer Specialist our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 650-153 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
CORRECT TEXT
A newly installed C-160 needs to have its access to downloads.ironport.com verified. Perform a port level test from the CLI of the C-160 by using the command string in lowercase with the appropriate port number.

A. telnetdownloads.ironport.com443

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following vendors produce Anti-Virus engines for the C-Series? (Choose two.)

A. Sophos
B. MCAfee
C. BrightMail
D. TrendMicro
E. Symantec

Answer: A,B


QUESTION NO: 3
Membership in which sender group will cause the C-Series to skip checking the SMTP envelope's"rcpt to" field against the RAT?

A. RELAYLIST
B. WHITELIST
C. BLACKLIST
D. SUSPECTLIST
E. UNKNOWNLIST

Answer: A
Practicetest 650-153 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-993 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-993 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

642-993 Data Center Unified Computing Systems Design (DCUCD) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 642-993 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Virtual device contexts enable which three of these activities? (Choose three.)

A. secure delineation of administrative configurations
B. separation and distribution of hardware resources
C. ability to test configurations without impacting production systems
D. ability to run different operating systems on the same physical hardware
E. extension of link aggregation to two separate physical switches

Answer: A,B,C


QUESTION NO: 2
A jumbo frame-aware data center is often implemented to provide performance improvements in which two of these technologies? (Choose two.)

A. iSCSI
B. NFS
C. Fiber Channel
D. quality of service
E. VoIP

Answer: A,B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which choice best describes NPV, with the connectivity of a Cisco UCS-B server connecting to a Fibre channel switch?

A. NPV allows a network-facing interface to proxy traffic from multiple servers onto a single link.
B. NPV allows local switching of Fibre Channel packets on the Cisco UCS 6100 Series Switches.
C. NPV load-balances traffic of a single server across multiple links.
D. NPV allows MAC-in-MAC encapsulation of Fibre Channel traffic for transport across a switch that is not a Cisco switch.

Answer: A

Practicetest 642-993 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 646-205 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 646-205 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

646-205 Cisco Sales Expert our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 646-205 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Network management saves time and money by automating which two tasks? (Choose two.)

A. Configuring changes to hardware and software
B. Monitoring online purchasing
C. Monitoring user access to storage files
D. Monitoring and troubleshooting network devices

Answer: AD



QUESTION 2
What is the Cisco collaboration per-person licensing option that simplifies purchasing and provides customers with maximum flexibility?

A. Cisco Unified Collaboration Licensing
B. Cisco Unified Communications Software Subscription
C. Cisco Unified Workspace Licensing
D. Cisco User Connect Licensing

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
Which Cisco product is a software component that blocks unwanted connections and provides other gateway security functions for small business?

A. Cisco Internetwork Operating System (IOS) Firewall
B. Cisco Secure Access Control Server (ACS)
C. Cisco Firewall Services Module (FWSM)
D. Cisco Private Internet Exchange (PIX) Firewall

Answer: A

Practicetest 646-205 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 646-985 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 646-985 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

646-985 Data Center Networking Solution Sales our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 646-985 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
You work as the network administrator at Company.com. Which of the following is correct if using the Cisco VFrame DC as a data center provisioning device?

A. Cisco VFrame DC can work only with the Nexus 7000 Series Switches.
B. Cisco VFrame DC can provision only network resources.
C. Cisco VFrame DC can work with VMware.
D. Cisco VFrame DC can work with the Catalyst 6500 Series Switches and the Nexus 7000 Series Switches but not with MDS.

Answer: C


QUESTION 2
You work as a Cisco engineer at Company.com. With your judgement, in the highly competitive networking switch market, which of the following can Cisco make that the competition cannot?

A. 10 Gigabit Ethernet is available on all switches and line cards, and blade switches for both data networks and storage networks..
B. Cisco has blade server switches for both data networking and storage networking requirements.
C. Cisco has a commitment to using Ethernet as the backbone connection system for the data center.
D. Cisco supports modular switches and top-of-rack switches for both Gigabit Ethernet and 10 Gigabit Ethernet, and blade switches for both data networks and storage networks.

Answer: D


QUESTION 3
You work as a Cisco engineer at Company.com. With your experience, which of the following description is the most closely one corresponding to a data center manager?

A. Data center manager is an alternative title for the chief technology officer and the person is responsible for all technology decision making in the data center.
B. Data center manager is a nonexecutive role and title that is found in all data centers and that tends to be administrative rather than technical.
C. The data center manager has technology decision-making authority within the data center, but the network team makes technology decisions after the connection leaves the immediate data center environment.
D. A specific, named role of data center manager might not exist, but the function and technical decision-making role almost certainly does.

Answer: D

Practicetest 646-985 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-741 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-741 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

642-741 Implementing Cisco Unified Wireless Voice Networks our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 642-741 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
What is the WMM user priority of the packets going downstream to the client when the client does not support TSPEC but the Cisco WLC has ACM enabled and WLAN priority is set to Platinum?

A. background
B. best effort
C. voice
D. video

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
When using simultaneous voice and multicast on a single WLAN and RF band, what is the recommended DTIM value of the WLAN for VoWLAN devices?

A. DTIM = 1
B. DTIM = 2
C. DTIM = 3
D. DTIM = 4

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
For which quality of service parameter should the WLAN for VoWLAN clients be configured?

A. Platinum
B. Gold
C. Silver
D. Bronze

Answer: A

Practicetest 642-741 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-746 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-746 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

642-746 Implementing Cisco Unified Wireless Mobility Services our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 642-746 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have configured WLAN override on an AP to broadcast one out of three WLANs on the Cisco WLC. The Cisco WLC fails and the AP with WLAN override moves to the secondary Cisco WLC. What should you do to ensure that the same SSID is being advertised as before? Select the best response.

A. Wait for the primary Cisco WLC to come back and manually move the AP back to the primary
Cisco WLC.
B. Make sure the two Cisco WLCs are in the same RF group.
C. Make sure the management addresses of the Cisco WLCs are on separate VLANs.
D. Make sure the secondary Cisco WLC has the same SSID profile configured as the primary.
E. Make sure AP fallback is enabled on both Cisco WLCs.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
A user walks from one building to another where each building has a Cisco WLC 4402 and 50 APs. However, the user does not get a new IP address from the second building's subnet. What is the reason for this behavior assuming all settings are at defaults? Select the best response.

A. User's DHCP release/renew interval has not timed-out yet.
B. Symmetric mobility tunneling is not enabled.
C. User idle-timeout has not expired yet, so this is considered as a roam.
D. User idle-timeout has expired, so this is considered as a roam.

Answer: C



QUESTION 3
Which port must be opened in the firewall if secure mobility tunneling is enabled between two controllers across a firewall?
Select the best response.

A. UDP 12222
B. UDP 16666
C. UDP 5246
D. UDP 16667
E. UDP 12223
F. UDP 5247

Answer: D

Practicetest 642-746 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-813 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-813 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

642-813 Implementing Cisco IP Switched Networks our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 642-813 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which two statements concerning STP state changes are true? (Choose two.)
A. Upon bootup, a port transitions from blocking to forwarding because it assumes itself as root.
B. Upon bootup, a port transitions from blocking to listening because it assumes itself as root.
C. Upon bootup, a port transitions from listening to forwarding because it assumes itself as root.
D. If a forwarding port receives no BPDUs by the max_age time limit, it will transition to listening.
E. If a forwarding port receives an inferior BPDU, it will transition to listening.
F. If a blocked port receives no BPDUs by the max_age time limit, it will transition to listening.
Answer: BF
Section: SpanningTree


QUESTION 2
In a customer's network, VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) is running with a domain named
main1. VLANs 1,2,3,4,5,10,20 are active on the network. Suddenly the whole network goes
down. No traffic is being passed on VLANs 2,3,4,5,10,20, however traffic passes on VLAN 1
and indicates all switches are operational. Right before the network problem occurred, a
switch named TEST1 was added to the network. What three configuration issues on TEST1
could be causing the network outage? (Choose three.)
A. TEST1 is configured as a VTP server with a different domain name.
B. TEST1 is not configured to participate in VTP.
C. TEST1 is configured as a VTP server with the domain name main1.
D. TEST1 has a lower VTP configuration revision than the current VTP revision.
E. TEST1 has a higher VTP configuration revision than the current VTP revision.
F. TEST1 is configured with only VLAN1.
Answer: CEF

QUESTION 3
Which statement is true about RSTP topology changes?
A. Only nonedge ports moving to the blocking state generate a TC BPDU.
B. Any loss of connectivity generates a TC BPDU.
C. Any change in the state of the port generates a TC BPDU.
D. Only nonedge ports moving to the forwarding state generate a TC BPDU.
E. If either an edge port or a nonedge port moves to a block state, then a TC BPDU is generated.
Answer: D

Practicetest 642-813 Cisco it-exams

Alles klar!

Alles klar!

Practicetest 642-731 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 642-731 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

642-731 Conducting Cisco Unified Wireless Site Survey our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 642-731 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which two Cisco antennas provide better isolation from RF sources that might be located behind the antennas?

A. AIR-ANT3213
B. AIR-ANT2465P-R
C. AIR-ANT1949
D. AIR-ANT5160V-R

Answer: BC


QUESTION 2
Which three formats can be used to import floor maps in Cisco WCS v5.2? (Choose three)

A. PNG
B. JPEG
C. GIF
D. BMP
E. PICT
F. TIFF

Answer: ABC


QUESTION 3
Cisco recommends a decibel referenced to 1 milliwatt signal level for the coverage cell edge at the predetermined data rate that is needed to support the VoWLAN device and call capacity requirements. What is that signal level value for Cisco Unified Wireless IP Phones 7920, 7921G, and 7925G?

A. -65 dBm
B. -67 dBm
C. -69 dBm
D. -70 dBm

Answer: B

Practicetest 642-731 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-864 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-864 Cisco it-exams


640-864 Designing for Cisco Internetwork Solutions our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 640-864 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which three of these describe the best practice for Cisco wireless outdoor Mesh network deployment? (Choose three.)

A. mesh hop counts of 4 or fewer
B. RAP implemented with 20 or fewer MAP nodes
C. client access via 802.11a and backhaul with 802.11b/g
D. client access via 802.11b/g and backhaul with 802.11a
E. mesh hop counts of 8 to 4
F. RAP implemented with 20 to 32 MAP nodes

Answer: ADF

Explanation/Reference:
Mesh Design Recommendations
The following are Cisco recommendations (and considerations) for mesh design:

Cisco Press CCDA 640-864 Official Certification Guide Fourth Edition, Chapter 5


QUESTION 2
The Cisco Data Center Network Architecture comprises which two Cisco SONA layers? (Choose two.)

A. Collaboration Applications
B. WAN/Internet
C. Interactive Services
D. Network Infrastructure
E. Business Applications

Answer: CD

Explanation/Reference:
Explanation: Explanation
The SONA framework denes the following three layers:
+ Networked Infrastructure layer: Where all the IT resources interconnect across a converged network foundation. The objective of this layer is to provide connectivity, anywhere and anytime. + Interactive Services layer: Includes both application networking services and infrastructure services. This layer enables efcient allocation of resources to applications and business processes delivered through the networked infrastructure.
+ Application layer: Includes business applications and collaboration applications. The objective of this layer is to meet business requirements and achieve efciencies by leveraging the Interactive Services layer.
With above information, you can answer question 2 and 3 below.


QUESTION 3
Which two of these are scalability benefits of designing a network that utilizes VPNs? (Choose two.)

A. reduces dial infrastructure expenditures
B. reduces the number of physical connections
C. allows networks to be set up and restructured quickly
D. simplifies the underlying structure of a customer WAN
E. extends the network to remote users

Answer: AB

Practicetest 640-864 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-822 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-822 Cisco it-exams

640-822 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 640-822 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
What source and destination information can you find in the data link layer?
A. port number
B. IP address
C. URL
D. MAC address
Answer: D

QUESTION 2
Which two statements best describe Cisco PAT implementation? (Choose two.)
A. implemented to conserve public IP addresses
B. can only be used between a private network and the Internet
C. provides address connectivity between public and private addresses
D. requires at least two public addresses to operate
Answer: AC

QUESTION 3
Install and configure three access points to cover a small office. Which one of the following
terms defines the wireless topology?
A. ESS
B. IBSS
C. SSID
D. BSS
Answer: A

Practicetest 640-822 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-816 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-816 Cisco it-exams

640-816 Interconnecting Cisco Networking Devices Part 2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 640-816 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
Which three statements about RSTP are true? (Choose three.)

A. RSTP significantly reduces topology reconverging time after a link failure.
B. RSTP expands the STP port roles by adding the alternate and backup roles.
C. RSTP port states are blocking, discarding, learning, or forwarding.
D. RSTP provides a faster transition to the forwarding state on point-to-point links than STP does.
E. RSTP also uses the STP proposal-agreement sequence.
F. RSTP uses the same timer-based process as STP on point-to-point links.

Answer: ABD



QUESTION 2
Assuming the default switch configuration, which VLAN range can be added, modified, and removed on a Cisco switch?

A. 1 through 1001
B. 2 through 1001
C. 1 through 1002
D. 2 through 1005

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
The ROUTE company has a small network. The network consists of one switch and one router. The switch has been configured with two VLANs. The router has been configured as a router-on- a-stick to allow inter-VLAN routing. A trunk is configured to connect the switch to the router. What is the minimum number of router subinterfaces that are required for all the VLANs to communicate?

A. zero
B. one
C. two
D. three

Answer: C

Practicetest

Practicetest 640-722 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-722 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

640-722 CCNA - Wireless Associate - IUWNE our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 640-722 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which two statements about the results of the Cisco WCS version 7.0 client troubleshooting tool are true? (Choose two.)

A. Results of Layers 1 - 3 are provided.
B. Results of only Layers 2 and 3 are provided.
C. Results of Layers 4 - 7 are provided.
D. The tabulated results vary depending on the client type.
E. Results are provided in a fixed four-part tabulation.
F. Results are provided in a fixed six-part tabulation.

Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 2
When using Cisco WCS version 7.0, which two features are available for the client troubleshooting tool when a Cisco Compatible Extensions v5 wireless client gets connected? (Choose two.)

A. Request CleanAir reports from the client
B. Send text messages to the client
C. Aggregated Cisco ACS authentication client information
D. Request the client to ping the DHCP-supplied IP gateway
E. Display a summary of client event history

Answer: B,D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which portion of a WLAN deployment can WLC message logs help to troubleshoot?
RF issues

A. encryption issues between APs and clients
B. configuration verification issues
C. infrastructure and client Issues
D. AP placement issues

Answer: D

Practicetest 640-722 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-802 Cisco it-exams

Practicetest 640-802 Cisco it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

640-802 Cisco Certified Network Associate(CCNA) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 640-802 Cisco it-exams


QUESTION 1
A network administrator receives an error message while trying to configure the Ethernet
interface of a router with IP address 10.24.24.24/29. Which statement explains the reason for
this issue?
A. This address is a broadcast address.
B. VLSM-capable routing protocols must be enabled first on the router.
C. The Ethernet interface is faulty.
D. This address is a network address.
Answer: D


QUESTION 2
What is the function of the command switchport trunk native vlan 999 on a trunk port?
A. It designates VLAN 999 for untagged traffic.
B. It blocks VLAN 999 traffic from passing on the trunk.
C. It creates a VLAN 999 interface.
D. It designates VLAN 999 as the default for all unknown tagged traffic
Answer: A


QUESTION 3
Which command encrypts all plaintext passwords?
A. Router# service password-encryption
B. Router(config)# service password-encryption
C. Router(config)# password-encryption
D. Router# password-encryption
Answer: B

Practicetest 640-802 Cisco it-exams

Freitag, 28. Dezember 2012

Yes, love is painful.

Yes, love is painful. Do you agree?

Bad mood!!

bad mood!!!

I don't want to hear any explanation.

I don't want to hear any explanation.

Practicetest 312-49 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 312-49 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

312-49 EC-COUNCIL Certified Associate.Java Platform.Se. Exam Version 1.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 312-49 EC-COUNCIL it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
In conducting a computer abuse investigation you become aware that the suspect of the
investigation is using ABC Company as his Internet Service Provider (ISP). You contact ISP and request that they provide you assistance with your investigation. What assistance can the ISP provide?

A. The ISP can investigate anyone using their service and can provide you with assistance
B. The ISP can investigate computer abuse committed by their employees, but must preserve the privacy of their customers and therefore cannot assist you without a warrant
C. The ISP can't conduct any type of investigations on anyone and therefore can't assist you
D. ISP's never maintain log files so they would be of no use to your investigation

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
You are assisting in the investigation of a possible Web Server Hack. The company who called you stated that customers reported to them that whenever they entered the web address of the company in their browser, what they received was a porno graphic web site. The company checked the web server and nothing appears wrong. When you type in the IP address of the web site in your browser everything appears normal. What is the name of the attack that affects the DNS cache of the name resolution servers, resulting in those servers directing users to the wrong web site?

A. ARP Poisoning
B. DNS Poisoning
C. HTTP redirect attack
D. IP Spoofing

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
You are working as an independent computer forensics investigator and receive a call from a systems administrator for a local school system requesting your assistance. One of the students at the local high school is suspected of downloading inappropriate images from the Internet to a PC in the Computer lab. When you arrive at the school, the systems administrator hands you a hard drive and tells you that he made a simple backup copy of the hard drive in the PC and put it on this drive and requests that you examine that drive for evidence of the suspected images. You inform him that a simple backup copy will not provide deleted files or recover file fragments. What type of copy do you need to make to ensure that the evidence found is complete and admissible in future proceedings?

A. Bit-stream Copy
B. Robust Copy
C. Full backup Copy
D. Incremental Backup Copy

Answer: A

Practicetest 312-49 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 312-50 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 312-50 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

312-50 Ethical Hacker Certified our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 312-50 EC-COUNCIL it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Bob has a good understanding of cryptography, having worked with it for many years.
Cryptography is used to secure data from specific threats but it does not secure the data
from the specific threats but it does no secure the application from coding errors. It can
provide data privacy; integrity and enable strong authentication but it can’t mitigate
programming errors. What is a good example of a programming error that Bob can use to
explain to the management how encryption will not address all their security concerns?
A. Bob can explain that using a weak key management technique is a form of programming error
B. Bob can explain that using passwords to derive cryptographic keys is a form of a programming error
C. Bob can explain that a buffer overflow is an example of programming error and it is a common mistake associated with poor programming technique
D. Bob can explain that a random number generation can be used to derive cryptographic keys but it uses a weak seed value and this is a form of a programming error

Answer: C

Explanation:
In computer security and programming, a buffer overflow, or buffer overrun, is a
programming error which may result in a memory access exception and program termination, or in the event of the user being malicious, a possible breach of system security.



QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following built-in C/C++ functions you should avoid to prevent your program
from buffer overflow attacks?
A. strcpy()
B. strcat()
C. streadd()
D. strscock()

Answer: A,B,C
Explanation:
When hunting buffer overflows, the first thing to look for is functions which write into
arrays without any way to know the amount of space available. If you get to define the function, you can pass a length parameter in, or ensure that every array you ever pass to it is at least as big as the hard-coded maximum amount it will write. If you're using a function someone else (like, say, the compiler vendor) has provided then avoiding functions like gets(), which take some amount of data over which you have no control and stuff it into arrays they can never know the size of, is a good start. Make sure that functions like the str...() family which expect NUL-terminated strings actually get them - store a '\0' in the last element of each array involved just before you call the
function, if necessary. Strscock() is not a valid C/C++ function.


QUESTION NO: 3
An attacker runs netcat tool to transfer a secret file between two hosts.
Machine A: netcat -1 –p 1234 < secretfile
Machine B: netcat 192.168.3.4 > 1234
He is worried about information being sniffed on the network.
How would the attacker use netcat to encrypt information before transmitting it on the
wire?
A. Machine A: netcat -1 –p –s password 1234 < testfile
Machine B: netcat 1234
B. Machine A: netcat -1 –e magickey –p 1234 < testfile
Machine B: netcat 1234
C. Machine A: netcat -1 –p 1234 < testfile –pw password
Machine B: netcat 1234 –pw password
D. Use cryptcat instead of netcat.

Answer: D

Practicetest 312-50 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 312-50v7 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 312-50v7 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

312-50v7 Ethical Hacking and Countermeasures (CEHv7) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 312-50v7 EC-COUNCIL it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
SSL has been seen as the solution to a lot of common security problems. Administrator will often time make use of SSL to encrypt communications from points A to point B. Why do you think this could be a bad idea if there is an Intrusion Detection System deployed to monitor the traffic between point A and B?
A. SSL is redundant if you already have IDS's in place
B. SSL will trigger rules at regular interval and force the administrator to turn them off
C. SSL will slow down the IDS while it is breaking the encryption to see the packet content
D. SSL will blind the content of the packet and Intrusion Detection Systems will not be able to detect them

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
Jake is a network administrator who needs to get reports from all the computer and network devices on his network. Jake wants to use SNMP but is afraid that won't be secure since passwords and messages are in clear text. How can Jake gather network information in a secure manner?
A. He can use SNMPv3
B. Jake can use SNMPrev5
C. He can use SecWMI
D. Jake can use SecSNMP

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
June, a security analyst, understands that a polymorphic virus has the ability to mutate and can change its known viral signature and hide from signature-based antivirus programs. Can June use an antivirus program in this case and would it be effective against a polymorphic virus?
A. Yes. June can use an antivirus program since it compares the parity bit of executable files to the database of known check sum counts and it is effective on a polymorphic virus
B. Yes. June can use an antivirus program since it compares the signatures of executable files to the database of known viral signatures and it is very effective against a polymorphic virus
C. No. June can't use an antivirus program since it compares the signatures of executable files to the database of known viral signatures and in the case the polymorphic viruses cannot be detected by a signature-based anti-virus program
D. No. June can't use an antivirus program since it compares the size of executable files to the database of known viral signatures and it is effective on a polymorphic virus

Answer: C

Practicetest 312-50v7 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 412-79 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 412-79 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

412-79 EC-Council Certified Security Analyst (ECSA) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 412-79 EC-COUNCIL it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Frank is working on a vulnerability assessment for a company on the West coast. The company hired Frank to assess its network security through scanning, pen tests, and vulnerability assessments. After discovering numerous known vulnerabilities detected by a temporary IDS he set up, he notices a number of items that show up as unknown but questionable in the logs. He looks up the behavior on the Internet, but cannot find anything related. What organization should Frank submit the log to find out if it is a new vulnerability or not?
A. CVE
B. IANA
C. RIPE
D. APIPA

Answer: A

Explanation:
Answer A is the correct answer. CVE (Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures) is a dictionary of publically known vulnerabilities and exposure maintained by Mitre.


QUESTION NO: 2
George is a senior security analyst working for a state agency in Florida. His state's congress just passed a bill mandating every state agency to undergo a security audit annually. After learning what will be required, George needs to implement an IDS as soon as possible before the first audit occurs. The state bill requires that an IDS with a "time-based induction machine" be used. What IDS feature must George implement to meet this requirement?
A. Pattern matching
B. Statistical-based anomaly detection
C. Real-time anomaly detection
D. Signature-based anomaly detection

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Software firewalls work at which layer of the OSI model?
A. Data Link
B. Network
C. Transport
D. Application

Answer: A

Practicetest 412-79 EC-COUNCIL it-exams

Practicetest 250-309 Symantec it-exams

Practicetest 250-309 Symantec it-exams

250-309 Administration of Symantec Enterprise Vault 9 for Exchange our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 250-309 Symantec it-exams


QUESTION 1
In which locations must auditing be enabled?

A. Directory and Policy
B. Site and Enterprise Vault Server
C. Directory and Site
D. Directory and Enterprise Vault Server

Answer: D


QUESTION 2
What is the minimum indexing level that supports phrase searching?

A. Brief
B. Medium
C. Full
D. All

Answer: C


QUESTION 3
When a Symantec Enterprise Vault 9 for Exchange (EV 9) alert reaches its threshold level, EV 9 writes an entry in the Event Log. EV 9 writes the alert to which other location?

A. EV Audit database
B. EV Trace logs
C. EV Status
D. EV Operations reports

Answer: C

Practicetest 250-309 Symantec it-exams

Practicetest 250-316 Symantec it-exams

Practicetest 250-316 Symantec it-exams

250-316 Administration of Symantec Backup Exec 2012 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.
IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 250-316 Symantec it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which two are required to correctly configure a Symantec Backup Exec 2012 Central
Administration Server (CAS) environment? (Select two.)

A. Only Fully Qualified Domain Names can be used for all servers.
B. Only the NetBIOS name can be used for all servers.
C. Servers must all be on the same subnet.
D. Servers must be part of a domain.
E. Servers must all be in the same time zone.

Answer: B,D


QUESTION NO: 2
Which two rights does Symantec Backup Exec 2012 assign to the Symantec Backup Exec Service Account during installation? (Select two.)

A. log on as a service
B. start, restart, or stop Symantec Backup Exec services
C. create a token object
D. alter file system objects
E. manage operator rights

Answer: A,C


QUESTION NO: 3
Which operation is available with legacy backup-to-disk folders when upgrading to Symantec Backup Exec 2012?

A. allows storing data back to the folder
B. allows reading and writing to the folder
C. allows only reading data from the folder
D. allows writing to the folder

Answer: C

Practicetest 250-316 Symantec it-exams

Practicetest 310-019 SUN it-exams

Practicetest 310-019 SUN it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

310-019 Sun Certified Associate.Java Platform.Se. Exam Version 1.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 310-019 SUN it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Which two are true? (Choose two.)
A. The javax.servlet package contains part of the servlet API.
B. A servlet is an open source framework developed for creating web applications.
C. A servlet is a Java class that executes within a web container.
D. A servlet is a Java class that executes within a web browser.
E. The servlet API is included in J2SE.
Answer: A,C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which two are true about JavaScript and HTML? (Choose two.)
A. HTML is displayed in a client-side environment.
B. JavaScript must be deployed in a separate file from HTML.
C. JavaScript runs only in a server-side environment.
D. JavaScript has a function that can open a new browser window.
Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 3
You are asked to create a Dog class that exposes the Dog class String name and int breed to
other code as read-only attributes, provides encapsulation, and adheres to the standard
JavaBeans naming conventions.
Which approach implements these requirements?
A. Provide public name() and public breed() methods in the Dog class, and mark the name and
breed instance variables private.
B. Provide private getName() and private getBreed() methods in the Dog class, and mark the
name and breed instance variables
private.
C. Provide public getName() and public getBreed() methods in the Dog class, and mark the name
and breed instance variables private.
D. Provide private name() and private breed() methods in the Dog class, and mark the name and
breed instance variables public.
E. Provide public getName()/setName() and public getBreed()/setBreed() methods in the Dog
class, and mark the name and breed
instance variables private.
Answer: C

Practicetest 310-019 SUN it-exams

Practicetest 200-530 Zend it-exams

Practicetest 200-530 Zend it-exams

200-530 Zend PHP 5.3 Certification our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 200-530 Zend it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
You work for a shared hosting provider, and your supervisor asks you to disable user scripts to dynamically load PHP extensions using the dl() function. How can you do this? (Choose 2)
A. Set enable_dl to Off in the server's php.ini configuration file.
B. Add dl to the current value of disable_functions in the server's php.ini configuration file.
C. Add dl to the current value of disable_classes in the server's php.ini configuration file.
D. Write a custom function called dl(), save it under the name prepend.inc and then set the auto_prepend_file directive to prepend.inc in php.ini.

Answer: A,B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following statements is NOT true?
a) Class constants are public
b) Class constants are being inherited
c) Class constants can omit initialization (default to NULL)
d) Class constants can be initialized by consts

A. a)
B. b)
C. c)
D. d)

Answer: C

QUESTION NO: 3
Type hinting in PHP allows the identification of the following variable types: (Choose 2)

A. String
B. Integer
C. Array
D. Any class or interface type

Answer: C,D

Practicetest 200-530 Zend it-exams

Practicetest 220-701 CompTIA it-exams

Practicetest 220-701 CompTIA it-exams

220-701 CompTIA A+ Essentials (2009) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 220-701 CompTIA it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A customer has asked for the ability to operate dual digital monitors. Which of the following is the BEST solution for accomplishing this?

A. Split the onboard video port.
B. Update the video drivers to allow for multiple monitors.
C. Add an adaptor to the onboard VGA port.
D. Install a video card with multiple DVI ports.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
A user is trying to use Remote Desktop to connect to another computer on the LAN. The
connection fails. The technician opens up a command prompt and types the following: “telnet computernamE. 3389” and also gets the same error message. Which of the following is the MOST likely cause of this error, assuming that the OS firewall has been disabled?

A. The antivirus software is blocking the incoming connection.
B. The ISP is blocking Remote Desktop at their end.
C. The RDP connection has been configured to use a non-standard port.
D. The telnet service has not been installed.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following is the correct arrangement of the data pairs in a T568B wire pattern? (Select TWO).

A. Orange & orange/white on pins 1 & 2
B. Blue & blue/white on pins 4 & 5
C. Orange & orange/white on pins 4 & 5
D. Brown & brown/white on pins 1 & 2
E. Green & green/white on pins 3 & 6

Answer: A,E

Practicetest 220-701 CompTIA it-exams

Practicetest 220-702 CompTIA it-exams

Practicetest 220-702 CompTIA it-exams

220-702 CompTIA A+ Practical Application (2009 Edition) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 220-702 CompTIA it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
A technician is replacing a processor in a workstation. After installation, the workstation starts up and immediately shuts down; the technician tries to start the workstation several more times and gets the same result. Which of the following is the cause of this issue?

A. The workstation is not plugged in.
B. The thermal paste was not applied.
C. The memory was not installed properly.
D. The L2 cache was not cleared.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following is the correct socket type for a Pentium 4 processor?

A. 478
B. 939
C. 1366
D. AM2+

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following is an advantage of installing a 64-bit processor versus a 32-bit processor?

A. Uses less bandwidth on the front side bus
B. Only requires half of the clock speed
C. Able to access a larger amount of RAM memory
D. Able to be used as two 32-bit processors

Answer: C

Practicetest 220-702 CompTIA it-exams

Practicetest 156-215.71 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 156-215.71 CheckPoint it-exams

156-215.71 Check Point Certified Security Administrator R71 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 156-215.71 CheckPoint it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
All R71 Security Servers can perform authentication with the exception of one. Which of the Security Servers cannot perform authentication?
A. RLOGIN
B. HTTP
C. SMTP
D. FTP

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following are authentication methods that Security Gateway R71 uses to validate connection attempts? Select the response below that includes the MOST complete list of valid authentication methods.
A. Proxied, User, Dynamic, Session
B. Connection, User, Client
C. User, Client, Session
D. Connection, Proxied, Session

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Security Gateway R71 supports User Authentication for which of the following services? Select the response below that contains the MOST complete list of supported services.
A. FTP, HTTP, TELNET
B. FTP, TELNET
C. SMTP, FTP, HTTP, TELNET
D. SMTP, FTP, TELNET

Answer: A

Practicetest 156-215.71 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 156-215.75 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 156-215.75 CheckPoint it-exams

156-215.75 Check Point Certified Security Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 156-215.75 CheckPoint it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
You receive a notification that long-lasting Telnet connections to a mainframe are dropped after an hour of inactivity. Reviewing SmartView Tracker shows the packet is dropped with the error:
"Unknown established connection"
How do you resolve this problem without causing other security issues? Choose the BEST
answer.

A. Increase the service-based session timeout of the default Telnet service to 24-hours.
B. Create a new TCP service object on port 23 called Telnet-mainframe. Define a service-based session Timeout of 24-hours. Use this new object only in the rule that allows the Telnet connections to the mainframe.
C. Ask the mainframe users to reconnect every time this error occurs.
D. Increase the TCP session timeout under Global Properties > Stateful Inspection.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which SmartConsole tool would you use to see the last policy pushed in the audit log?

A. SmartView Tracker
B. None, SmartConsole applications only communicate with the Security Management Server.
C. SmartView Status
D. SmartView Server

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
SmartView Tracker logs the following Security Administrator activities, EXCEPT:

A. Administrator login and logout
B. Object creation, deletion, and editing
C. Tracking SLA compliance
D. Rule Base changes

Answer: C

Practicetest 156-215.75 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 156-315.75 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 156-315.75 CheckPoint it-exams

156-315.75 Check Point Certified Security Expert (CCSE) R75 (156-315-75) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 156-315.75 CheckPoint it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
What port is used for communication to the UserCenter with SmartUpdate?

A. HTTP
B. HTTPS
C. TCP 8080
D. CPMI

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
What physical machine must have access to the UserCenter public IP when checking for new packages with SmartUpdate?

A. VPN-1 Security Gateway getting the new upgrade package
B. SmartUpdate installed SmartCenter Server PC
C. SmartUpdate Repository SQL database Server
D. SmartUpdate GUI PC

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
What action CANNOT be run from SmartUpdate NGX R65?

A. Get all Gateway Data
B. Reboot gateway
C. Preinstall verifier?
D. Fetch sync status

Answer: D

Practicetest 156-315.75 CheckPoint it-exams

Practicetest 190-956 Lotus it-exams

Practicetest 190-956 Lotus it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

190-956 IBM Lotus Notes Domino 8.5 System Administration Update our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 190-956 Lotus it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Carl, the Domino administrator, wishes to migrate users to dynamic policies in his Domino
environment. Which of the following will occur when he completes this task?
A. Groups with each policy name are created, and users are assigned to the new group policies
B. Users are added to policy documents, and applied policies are removed from their person document
C. Policies are added to the necessary person documents, and document links are assigned to the policy documents
D. Policies are removed from the users entirely until theyreauthenticate and the new dynamic policies are applied

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
While upgrading his Domino servers to 8.5, Clint is considering utilizing the Domino Attachment and Object Service. He has not migrated all of his databases to the new on-disk structure (ODS), however, so the option is not available. Which of the following steps can he perform to prepare them for DAOS?
A. He can pre-enable them for consolidation
B. He can create a program document to enable the feature
C. He can change the file extension of the databases to .ns8
D. He can create an Administration Process request that will process only when the databases are upgraded

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
Domino roaming for the Notes standard configuration clients in Domino 8.5 and higher offers the ability to synchronize which of the following?
A. A notebook database and user ID file
B. The user ID file and local Eclipse XML configuration files
C. A feeds subscription database and an Eclipse plug-in data and preferences database
D. The Activities plug-in configuration and the integratedSametime Connect configurations

Answer: C

Practicetest 190-956 Lotus it-exams

Practicetest 117-102 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-102 Lpi it-exams

117-102 General Linux, Part 2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 117-102 Lpi it-exams


QUESTION 1
What is the purpose of the bash built-in export command
A. To allow disks to be mounted remotely
B. To run a command as a process in a sub-shell
C. To make the command history available to sub-shells
D. To setup environment variables for applications
E. To share NFS partitions for use by other systems on the network

Answer: D

Explanation/Reference:
From the man pages:
export -p The supplied names are marked for automatic export to the environment of subsequently executed commands. If the -f option is given, the names refer to functions. If no names are given, or if the -p option is supplied, a list of all names that are exported in this shell is printed. The -n option causes the export property to be removed from each name. If a variable name is followed by =word, the value of the variable is set to word.


QUESTION 2
Your /etc/passwd file appears to have approximately half shadow passwords and half standard unix excrypted passwords. What utility would you most likely run to fix this?
A. pwconv
B. passconvert
C. useradd -conv
D. pwhash
E. passwd -fix

Answer: A

Explanation/Reference:
From the man pages:
The pwconv command creates shadow from passwd and an optionally existing shadow.


QUESTION 3
Where are the default settings for the useradd command kept?
A. /etc/default/useradd
B. /etc/.useradd
C. /etc/defauls/useradd
D. /etc/sysconfig/useradd.cfg

Answer: A

Practicetest 117-102 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-201 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-201 Lpi it-exams

117-201 LPI level 2 Exam 201 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 117-201 Lpi it-exams


QUESTION 1
What backup arrangement should be used for an intranet web server the contents of which is updated fairly regularly by different staff?
A. Daily incremental backups with a weekly full backup tape sent off- site
B. Monthly full backups with the tape sent off-site
C. Daily full backups with all tapes sent off-site
D. Weekly full backups with all tapes sent off-site
E. Daily full backups with one tape sent off-site per week

Answer: A

Explanation/Reference:
Daily full backup for only fairly regularly updated data seems a bit overkill, so just do daily incrementals and weekly full backup to be on the safe side.


QUESTION 2
During which stage of the boot process would this message be seen?
Ide0: BM-DMA at 0xff00-0xff07, BIOS settings: hda:DMA, hdb:DMA
A. Boot loader start and hand off to kernel
B. Kernel loading
C. Hardware initialization and setup
D. Daemon initialization and setup

Answer: C

QUESTION 3
What is a significant difference between host and zone keys generated by dnssec-keygen?
A. There is no difference.
B. Zone key files contain a public and private key.
C. Host keys files contain a public and private key.
D. Host keys must always be generated if DNSSEC is used; zone keys are optional
E. Zone keys must always be generated if DNSSEC is used; host keys are optional

Answer: B

Practicetest 117-201 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-202 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-202 Lpi it-exams

117-202 LPI level 2 Exam 202 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 117-202 Lpi it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Select the TWO correct statements about the following excerpt from httpd.conf:


Order allow, deny
Deny from all


A. The configuration will deny access to /var/web/dir1/private.html,
/var/web/dirl/subdir2/private.html, /var/web/dirl/subdir3/private.html and any other instance of private.html found under the /var/web/dir1/directory.
B. The configuration will deny access to /var/web/dir1/private.html, but it will allow access to /var/web/dirl/subdir2/private.htm1, for example.
C. The configuration will allow access to any file named private.html under /var/web/dir1, but it will deny access to any other files
D. The configuration will allow access just to the file named private.html under /var/web/dir1
E. The configuration will allow access to /var/web/private.html, if it exists

Answer: A,E



QUESTION NO: 2
Considering the following excerpt from the httpd.conf file, select the correct answer below:

AllowOverride AuthConfig Indexes

A. The Indexes directive in the excerpt allows the use of other index-related directives such as DirectoryIndex
B. Both directives AuthConfig and Indexes found in the server's .htaccess file will be overridden by the same directives found in the httpd.conf file
C. The AuthConfig used in the excerpt allows the use of other authentication-related directives such as AuthType
D. The excerpt is incorrect, as the AllowOverride cannot be used with Indexes, since the latter cannot be overridden
E. The excerpt is incorrect, because AllowOverride cannot be used inside a Location section

Answer: E


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following lines in the Apache configuration file would allow only clients with a valid certificate to access the website?
A. SSLCA conf/ca.crt
B. AuthType ssl
C. IfModule libexec/ssl.c
D. SSLRequire
E. SSLVerifyClient require

Answer: E

Practicetest 117-202 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 77-882 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 77-882 Microsoft it-exams

77-882 Excel 2010 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 77-882 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
Your work at ABC.com includes the preparation of workbooks using Microsoft Office Excel 2010.
You have finished a lengthy report about product sales for the past year and project sales for the next year. The workbook lists the name of a product multiple times.
The company releases a new version of the product and the product name is changed to reflect the update.
You want to use the Replace dialog box to change every instance of the product name throughout the spreadsheet.
Which of the following key combinations opens the Replace dialog box?

A. Ctrl + R
B. Ctrl + B
C. Ctrl + H
D. Ctrl + F

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
You work as the Financial Director at ABC.com. You are using Microsoft Office Excel 2010 to review the end-of-year financial reports from the ABC.com Sales department and from a partner company named Weyland Industries.
Weyland Industries is based in Mexico. The Weyland Industries financial report contains some text written in Spanish. To discover the meaning of the Spanish text, you navigate to the Proofing group on the Review tab and click the Translate button.
Which of the following would also give you the option to translate the Spanish text?

A. The Lookup and Reference function in the Function Library group on the Formulas tab.
B. The Format option in the Cells group on the Home tab.
C. The Research function in the Proofing group on the Review tab.
D. The Thesaurus function in the Proofing group on the Review tab.

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Your work as a Sales Administrator in the ABC.com Sales office includes the production of
workbooks using Microsoft Office Excel 2010.
You are working on a Sales report for the last quarter. You insert a table into a worksheet and populate the table with the names of the Sales people and their total sales over the last three months.
Which of the following Excel functions can you NOT do if your workbook contains a table?

A. You will be unable to mark the workbook as final.
B. You will be unable to share the workbook.
C. You will be unable to encrypt the workbook.
D. You will be unable to run the Document Inspector.

Answer: B

Practicetest 77-882 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 117-101 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 117-101 Lpi it-exams

117-101 General Linux, Part 1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 117-101 Lpi it-exams


QUESTION 1
What is a reasonable command to uninstall a Debian package from your system?
A. dpkg -Ra pkgname
B. dpkg -R pkgname
C. dpkg -r pkgname
D. dpkg -ra pkgname

Answer: C


QUESTION 2
You want to install a new software package, but it is only available in RPM format and you are running Debian Linux. Which of the following would help you to install it on your system?
A. alien
B. apt-conf
C. dselect
D. cpio

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
What command will uninstall a package but leave its configuration files in case a package is re-installed?
A. none, no command will do this
B. dpkg -s pkgname
C. dpkg -L pkgname
D. dpkg -P pkgname
E. dpkg -r pkgname

Answer: E

Practicetest 117-101 Lpi it-exams

Practicetest 70-691 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-691 Microsoft it-exams

70-691 TS: Windows HPC Server 2008, Developing our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-691 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You deploy a Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service in a Windows HPC 2008 cluster. You need to measure the usage of the cluster network by using the Windows HPC Server 2008 Administration Console.
What should you do?

A. Examine the Monitoring Charts.
B. Run the Job Turnaround report.
C. Examine the Performance Charts for the head node of the cluster.
D. Run the SOAServiceConfigurationReport test for the broker node of the cluster.

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
You plan to develop a parallel application by using Windows HPC Server 2008. You plan to use a method to control the calculations performed by each individual process. You need to ensure that different commands can be sent to each process.
Which function should you use?

A. MPI_Send
B. MPI_Bcast
C. MPI_Gather
D. MPI_Reduce

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
You plan to develop a parallel application by using Windows HPC Server 2008. You need to implement a method that will send different data to each process in a communicator by using a single call.
Which function should you use?

A. MPI_Send
B. MPI_Gather
C. MPI_Reduce
D. MPI_Scatter

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-691 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-693 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-693 Microsoft it-exams

70-693 Windows Server 2008R2, Virtualization Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-693 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You plan to deploy a Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI).
You need to ensure that all of the changes made to the virtual machines (VMs) in the VDI are discarded when users log off of their session.

What should you include in the deployment?

A. mandatory profiles
B. a virtual desktop pool
C. roaming profiles
D. personal virtual desktops

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
pool is the recommended solution when we need discarding virtual desktops


QUESTION 2
Your network contains an Active Directory domain. All domain controllers run Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack 1 (SP1). You need to recommend a design for the Hyper-V host infrastructure that meets the following requirements:
- Maximizes storage performance.
- Remains available if a host server fails.
- Minimizes hardware and software costs.
- Supports redundant access to shared storage.

What should you include in the recommendation? (Choose all that apply)

A. Failover Clustering
B. Remote Desktop Services (RDS)
C. Microsoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2
D. a Storage Area Network (SAN)
E. Network Attached Storage (NAS)
F. Network Load Balancing (NLB)
G. Multipath I/O

Answer: ADG

Explanation/Reference:
A D and G is the minimal solution for given requirements. No need SCVMM - it's increase software costs.


QUESTION 3
All servers on your company's network run Windows Server 2008 R2. All client computers run Windows 7. The company is planning to virtualize an application that runs only on Windows XP.
You need to recommend a Virtualization solution that enables users to access the virtualized application while their computers are disconnected from the corporate network.

Which technology should you recommend?

A. Microsoft Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI)
B. Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Virtualization (MED-V)
C. Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V)
D. Remote Desktop Services (RDS)

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-693 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 74-324 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 74-324 Microsoft it-exams

74-324 Administering Office 365 for Small Businesses our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 74-324 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION: 1
You need to select an Office 365 subscription that provides Microsoft Exchange Online
email, Microsoft SharePoint Online, Microsoft Lync Online, Microsoft Office Web Apps,
and a hosted website for your business. Which three plans meet the requirements? (Each
correct answer presents a complete solution. Choose three.)

A. Office 365 El Plan
B. Office 365 PI Plan
C. Office 365 E3 Plan
D. Office 365 P2 Plan
E. Office 365 E4 Plan
F. Office 365 E2 Plan

Answer: B, C, F


QUESTION: 2
Your company has an Office 365 subscription. All user mailboxes are hosted on
Microsoft Exchange Online. You need to assign the minimum permissions necessary to
ensure that an Office 365 administrator can create custom administrator roles for several
regional help desk technicians. The custom roles will be used to manage Exchange
Online. To which role or role group should you assign the administrator?

A. Records Management
B. Service administrator
C. Password administrator
D. Recipient Management
E. Global administrator
F. Help Desk
G. UM Management
H. Organization Management

Answer: H


QUESTION: 3
You need to select an Office 365 subscription that provides cloud-based email, an
intranet site for your team, a hosted website for your business, instant messaging,
computer-to-computer calling, video conferencing, Active Directory Domain Services
(AD DS) integration, a subscription to the current version of Microsoft Office, and
enterprise voice capabilities. Which plan meets the requirements?

A. Office 365 El Plan
B. Office 365 E2 Plan
C. Office 365 E4 Plan
D. Office 365 E3 Plan

Answer: C

Practicetest 74-324 Microsoft it-exams

MB7-839

MB7-839 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com MB7-839 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification MB7-839 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass MB7-839 Exam it-exams.com MB7-839 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the MB7-839 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your MB7-839 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions MB7-839 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online MB7-839 preparation materials, through the MB7-839 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com MB7-839 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With MB7-839 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com MB7-839 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

MB5-858

MB5-858 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com MB5-858 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification MB5-858 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass MB5-858 Exam it-exams.com MB5-858 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the MB5-858 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your MB5-858 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions MB5-858 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online MB5-858 preparation materials, through the MB5-858 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com MB5-858 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With MB5-858 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com MB5-858 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

70-518

70-518 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 70-518 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 70-518 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 70-518 Exam it-exams.com 70-518 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 70-518 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 70-518 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 70-518 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 70-518 preparation materials, through the 70-518 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 70-518 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 70-518 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 70-518 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

70-453

70-453 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 70-453 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 70-453 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 70-453 Exam it-exams.com 70-453 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 70-453 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 70-453 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 70-453 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 70-453 preparation materials, through the 70-453 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 70-453 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 70-453 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 70-453 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-690 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-690 Microsoft it-exams

70-690 TS: Windows HPC Server 2008, Configuring and Managing our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-690 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You administer a Windows HPC Server 2008 cluster for your company named Contoso, Ltd.
The cluster is integrated into a forest that hosts three domains named CONTOSO1, CONTOSO2, and CONTOSO3.
You plan to remove the saved credentials of a user named User1 on the CONTOSO2 domain.
The password of User1 was compromised.
You need to remove the saved password of User1 from the cluster without accessing the workstation of User1.
What should you do?

A. Run the following command: cluscfg delcreds /user:User1
B. Run the following PowerShell cmdlet: Remove-HpcJobCredential CUserName CONTOSO2\User1
C. Run the following command: clusrun /all "cmdkey /del %computername%"
D. Run the following PowerShell cmdlet: Remove-HpcJobCredential CUserName User1

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
explictly we have to mention the user as CONTOSO2\User1.


QUESTION 2
You are managing a Windows HPC Server 2008 cluster that has four compute nodes. The HPC Pack Client Utilities are installed on each compute node.
For new cluster applications to locate their license server, the applications require a new environment variable named LM_LIC that must be set to contoso1 for all cluster jobs.
You need to set LM_LIC to contoso1 permanently on all compute nodes for all user jobs that are submitted to the cluster.
What should you do?

A. Run the set LM_LIC=contoso1 command on the head node.
B. Run the set LM_LIC=contoso1 command on each compute node.
C. Run the cluscfg setenvs LM_LIC=contoso1 command on the head node.
D. Run the job submit /env:LM_LIC=contoso1 hostname.exe command on each compute node.

Answer: C

Explanation/Reference:
cluscfg setenvs: Sets the values of one or more specified cluster-wide environment variables.
cluscfg setenvs =[=...] [/scheduler:]
cluscfg setenvs {/? | /help}

To create your own cluster-wide environment variable, use the cluscfg setenvs command to set a value for it.

You must be a cluster administrator to run this command successfully.

Examples

To set the environment variable named MyVariable equal to 1, use the following command:

cluscfg setenvs MyVariable=1
To set the environment variable named Variable1 equal to 150, unset the environment variable named Variable2, and set the environment variable named Variable3 to C:\MyFolder, use the following command:

cluscfg setenvs Variable1=150 Variable2= Variable3=C:\MyFolder


QUESTION 3
You administer a Windows HPC Server 2008 cluster that is integrated into the Active Directory domain of your company.
HPC Pack 2008 is installed on your computer for remote administration. You schedule maintenance of the cluster for the third Sunday of every month.
You need to move all nodes in the cluster to the Offline state to start the maintenance tasks.
Which command should you run?

A. node pause /all
B. node pause ComputeNodes
C. Get-hpcnode Cstate offline
D. Get-hpcnode Cgroup ComputeNodes | set-hpcnodestate Cstate draining

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-690 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-686 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-686 Microsoft it-exams

70-686 Pro: Windows 7, Enterprise Desktop Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-686 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have a single Active Directory domain. All domain controllers run Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack 1 (SP1). You plan to store Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption recovery passwords in Active Directory. You need to recommend the solution that uses the least amount of administrative effort. What should you recommend?

A. Upgrade the domain controller that has the role of operations master to Windows Server 2008 R2.
B. Upgrade all domain controllers to Windows Server 2008 R2.
C. Upgrade all domain controllers to Windows Server 2003 SP2.
D. Extend the Active Directory schema.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
You create a Windows 7 deployment image that includes custom Internet Explorer branding and search providers. Your company decides to deploy all custom settings by using Group Policy. You need to restore the Internet Explorer settings in the deployment image to the Microsoft default settings. Which two actions should you perform? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Use the Reset Internet Explorer Settings (RIES) feature, and run the Remove Branding
process on the deployment image.
B. Update the Internet Explorer Maintenance policy processing Group Policy object (GPO)
settings for all computers.
C. Update the Internet Explorer Manage Add-ons settings for all computers.
D. Use the Reset Internet Explorer Settings (RIES) feature, and run the Reset process on the
deployment image.

Answer: AD



QUESTION 3
Your company has an Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) forest with a single domain. The domain, organizational unit (OU), and Group Policy object (GPO) design is shown in the following diagram. The NY Computers OU contains client computers that run either Windows Vista Enterprise or Windows 7 Enterprise. The New York Computers GPO defines software restriction policies (SRPs). You have the following requirements: SRPs must be used for only Windows Vista Enterprise client computers. AppLocker policies must be used for only Windows 7 Enterprise client computers. AppLocker policies must be defined by using Group Policy. You need to design an AppLocker deployment that meets these requirements. What should you do?

A. Create a new GPO that has the AppLocker settings, and link it to the NY Users OU.
B. Define the AppLocker settings in the New York Baseline GPO.
C. Define the AppLocker settings in the New York Users GPO.
D. Create a new GPO that has the AppLocker settings, and link it to the NY Computers OU.

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-686 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-687 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-687 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-687 Configuring Windows 8 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-687 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
A company has client computers that run Windows 8. On all client computers, Internet Explorer has the Display intranet sites in Compatibility View option enabled and the Download updated compatibility lists from Microsoft option disabled.
The corporate website was designed for a previous version of Internet Explorer. When viewed on the client computers, menus and image on the corporate website are displayed out of place.
You need to ensure that the corporate website displays correctly on the client computers without negatively impacting the display of any other website.

What should you do?

A. Manually add the corporate website to the compatibility view settings.
B. Enable the Display all websites in Compatibility View option.
C. Disable the Display intranet sites in Compatibility View option.
D. Manually download an updated compatibility list from Microsoft.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
A portable computer that runs Windows 8 uses a mobile broadband connection for the corporate wireless network.
The computer also ha a wired corporate network connection. The computer successfully downloads Windows updates when connected to either network.
You need to ensure that the computer automatically downloads updates by using Windows Update only while connected to the wired corporate network connection.

What should you do?

A. Set the corporate wireless network to metered.
B. Set the corporate wireless network to non-metered.
C. Configure the Specify intranet Microsoft update service location local Group Policy setting.
D. Configure a Windows Firewall connection security rule.

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
You manage client computers that run Windows 7 and Windows 8. You are configuring Windows updates for all client computers. You have the following requirements:
· All client computers must use a specific Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) server for updates.
· All client computers must check for updates each hour. You need to configure local Group Policy settings to meet the requirements.

Which three actions should you perform? (Each answer presents part of the solution. Choose three.)

A. Configure the Automatic Maintenance Activation Boundary policy setting.
B. Configure the Automatic Updates detection frequency policy setting.
C. Enable the Specify intranet Microsoft update service location policy setting.
D. Enable the Configure Automatic Updates policy setting for automatic download and scheduled
installation.
E. Enable the Reschedule Automatic Updates scheduled installations policy setting.

Answer: CDE

Practicetest 70-687 Microsoft it-exams

MB7-838

MB7-838 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com MB7-838 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification MB7-838 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass MB7-838 Exam it-exams.com MB7-838 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the MB7-838 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your MB7-838 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions MB7-838 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online MB7-838 preparation materials, through the MB7-838 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com MB7-838 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With MB7-838 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com MB7-838 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-680 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-680 Microsoft it-exams

70-680 Windows 7,Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-680 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have a computer that runs Windows 7. The computer is joined to a domain. You need to ensure that only approved USB drives can be used on the computer. Which two policy settings should you configure? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Enable Prevent installation of removable devices.
B. Enable Prevent installation of devices not described by other policy settings.
C. Enable Prevent installation of devices that match any of these device IDs and enter the
device ID for the approved USB drives.
D. Enable Allow installation of devices that match any of these device IDs and enter the
device ID for the approved USB drives.

Answer: BD



QUESTION 2
You need to ensure that when you insert a blank DVD into the DVD drive, Windows Explorer opens automatically and enables you to select files to burn to DVD. What should you do?

A. From Default Programs, modify the AutoPlay settings.
B. From Default Programs, modify the default program settings.
C. From Device Manager, modify the properties of the DVD drive.
D. From System Configuration Utility, modify the Startup settings.

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
Your network contains computers that run either Windows Vista (x86) or Windows 7 (x86). All computers are joined to a domain. You install a computer named Computer1 that runs Windows 7 (64-bit). You share a printer named Printer1 on Computer1. You need to ensure that any user can automatically download and install the drivers for Printer1. What should you do from Printer Properties?

A. Install a new driver.
B. Enable bidirectional support.
C. Modify the Additional Drivers settings.
D. Assign the Manage this printer permission to the Domain Users group.

Answer: C

Practicetest 70-680 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-681 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-681 Microsoft it-exams

70-681 TS: Windows 7 and Office 2010, Deploying our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-681 Microsoft it-exams


1. You have a single-domain Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) forest. Office Outlook 2007 is installed on all client computers. All client computers run the 64-bit version of Windows 7.
You attempt to install the 32-bit version of Outlook 2010 by using a startup script. The installation fails. You need to install Outlook 2010 on all client computers.
What should you do?

A. Specify the 64-bit version of Outlook 2010 in the startup script.
B. Uninstall Outlook 2007 and reboot.
C. Run the 32-bit Outlook 2010 Setup program as a local administrator on the client computers.

D. Run the 64-bit Outlook 2010 Setup program with the /admin option on the client computers.

Answer: B


2. Your company has a single-domain Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) forest with 3,000 client computers that run Windows 7. The company has a main office and 50 branch offices. The company uses System Center Configuration Manager 2007 R2 to deploy applications to client computers.
You need to deploy Office 2010 installation source files to each client computer, without installing Office

2010.

How should you modify the Config.xml file?

A. Set the attribute to CacheOnly.

B. Set the attribute to C:\MsoCache\All Users.

C. Set the attribute to %ProgramFiles%\Microsoft Office.

D. Set the attribute to the path of the network installation point.

Answer: A


3. You are preparing to capture an image from a Windows 7 reference computer.

The reference computer has a modem installed, and Windows 7 drivers are installed for the modem. You need to prepare the Windows 7 image so that the image does not contain the modem drivers.
Which two actions should you perform? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Use the Sysprep tool with the /audit option.

B. Use the Sysprep tool with the /generalize option.

C. Include the shellexecute option in the Oobe.xml file.

D. Set the PersistAllDeviceInstalls option to True in an answer file.

Answer: AB

Practicetest 70-681 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-685 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-685 Microsoft it-exams

70-685 Pro: Windows 7,Enterprise Desktop Support Technician our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-685 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
A client computers on your company network run Windows 7. Employees log on to their computers as Standard users.
There is a zero-day malicious software attack affecting your network. Employees receive User AccountControl (UAC) messages frequently requesting permission to elevate privileges. You know that this malicious software attack is responsible for these UAC prompts.
You need to ensure that employees are unable to provide elevated credentials.
What should you do?
A. Configure the Group Policy User Account Control: Only elevate executables that are
signed and validated setting to Disabled.
B. Configure the Group Policy User Account Control: Switch to the secure desktop when
prompting for elevation setting to Disabled.
C. Configure the Group Policy User Account Control: Behavior of the elevation prompt for
standard users setting to Automatically deny elevation requests.
D. Configure the Group Policy User Account Control: Behavior of the elevation prompt
for administrators in Admin Approval Mode setting to Prompt for consent for non-Windows binaries.

Answer: C


QUESTION 2
You have an Active Directory domain. All client computers run Windows 7 and are joined to the domain.
The help desk reports that several users recently downloaded and installed malware.
You discover that the users modified the Windows Defender settings on their computers.
You need to recommend a solution to prevent users from modifying their Windows Defender settings.

What should you recommend?
A. Modify the User Account Control (UAC) settings.
B. Modify the membership of the local Administrators group.
C. From Program and Features, modify the Windows Features.
D. From a Group Policy object (GPO), modify the Windows Defender settings.

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
All client computers on your company network run Windows 7. The computers are members of a Windows Server 2008 R2 domain.
You need to ensure that data stored on removable drives is encrypted.
What should you do?
A. Set the Removable Disks:Deny write access option by using Group Policy.
B. Set the Control use of BitLocker on removable drives option to Allow users to apply
BitLocker on removable drives by using Group Policy.
C. Set the Configure use of passwords for removable data drives option to Require password
for removable data drive by using Group Policy.
D. Enable the Deny write access to removable drives not protected by BitLocker option by
using Group Policy.

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-685 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-671 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-671 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-671 Designing and Providing Microsoft Volume Licensing Solutions to Small and Medium Organizations our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-671 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION NO: 1
If Mills & Co installed Microsoft Office 2010 on their client computers, which two types of
installation key could they use?
A. They could use a Multiple Activation Key or a Key Management Service key.
B. They could use a Product Key Card key or a Key Management Service key.
C. They could use an Enterprise Agreement Key or a Product Key Card key.
D. They could use a Key Management Service key or an Enterprise Agreement key.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
You have recommended that Mills & Co purchase the Microsoft Office licenses using a Volume Licensing Program. Which Volume Licensing Program would meet the business goals?
A. The Microsoft Open License with Software Assurance program.
B. The Microsoft Open License without Software Assurance program.
C. The Microsoft Enterprise Agreement program.
D. The Microsoft Select License program.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
Which two of the following benefits of Volume Licensing meet the business goals of the company? (Choose two)
A. Microsoft Office can be installed on a licensed desktop and on a portable computer.
B. Licenses can be transferred to other computers.
C. License compliance is easier to manage using the Volume Licensing Service Center.
D. You can run any previous version of Microsoft Office under a Volume License.
E. You can install multiple versions of Microsoft Office on a single licensed device.

Answer: A,C

Practicetest 70-671 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-672 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-672 Microsoft it-exams

70-672 Design and Providing MS Vol Licensing Solutions to Large Orgs our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-672 Microsoft it-exams


Question 3 of 6:
You need to identify the services that meet the company’s business goals for the remote users. Of the following options, which service should you recommend?

A. Exchange Hosted Services
B. Rights Management Services
C. Windows SharePoint Services
D. Enterprise Subscription Services
E. Terminal Services

Answer: E


Question 4 of 6:
You need to identify the Volume Licensing agreement that provides the best annual return on investment (ROI) for NCCC. Which Volume Licensing agreement should you recommend?

A. Select License Agreement.
B. Enterprise Subscription Agreement.
C. Select Plus Agreement
D. Enterprise Agreement
E. None of the above

Answer: D


Question 5 of 6:
In the options below, which Software Assurance benefit provides the best return on investment (ROI) for the IT department?

A. Training Vouchers assurance benefit
B. eLearning assurance benefit
C. Home Use Program assurance benefit
D. TechNet Plus Subscription assurance benefit

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-672 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-673 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-673 Microsoft it-exams

70-673 TS: Designing, Assessing,and Optimizing Software Asset Management (SAM) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-673 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
Your customer uses a software inventory and a SAM tool. The database of the SAM tool is linked with the inventory tool.
The SAM tool has provided a database for detection of applications. This library contains a list of software that can identify the SAM tool.
They note that the software inventory has no MS Office 2007 installations. Make sure that Office 2007 is installed on some desktop PCs.
You must ensure that manages the software inventory tool all Office 2007 installations.
What should you do?

A. Update the SAM database tools in the application database
B. Installation of all software updates and security patches for Office 2007
C. Upgrade of all desktop PCs that run under Office 2007 on Windows Vista
D. Installing the Microsoft System Center Operation Manager in the Networ

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
My Software Inventory Report identified several installations of unauthorized software on company computers.
They should establish a process that prevents employees to install software.
What would you include in the process?

A. Installation of a Network Monitoring Tools
B. Updating of hardware and software inventories
C. Ask that an IT administrator adjusts the GPOs
D. Generating a license advisory report and contact the BCA

Answer: C


QUESTION 3
You plan the assessment of a SAM process, the customers of different departments. To create a survey, the information in the context of the SAM process over the entire
Organization of time collecting. You need to validate the information that is gathered in the survey.
What should you do?

A. The CEO interview
B. The IT staff to interview
C. The department heads interviewed
D. The employees of the shopping interview

Answer: C
Practicetest 70-673 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-665 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-665 Microsoft it-exams

70-665 PRO:Microsoft Lync Server 2010,Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-665 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You need to recommend a solution to ensure that when users from the New York office travel to the London office, and they dial 911, the call is routed to the local emergency services operator. What should you include in the recommendation?

A. Modify the Dial Plan settings for the London office.
B. Implement Site Location Policies.
C. Implement User Location Policies.
D. Modify the Dial Plan settings for the New York office.

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
You need to assign Location Policy to a site, as travelling users need local and not home 911. (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/gg425828.aspx)


QUESTION 2
You need to recommend a solution to control conferencing. The solution must meet the companys conferencing requirements. What should you recommend?

A. Enable all of the conferencing features in the Global Conferencing Policy.
Create a User Conferencing Policy for each feature.
B. Disable all of the conferencing features in the Global Client Policy.
Create a User Client Policy for each feature.
C. Enable all of the conferencing features in the Global Client Policy.
Create a User Client Policy for each group.
D. Disable all of the conferencing features in the Global Conferencing Policy.
Create a User Conferencing Policy for each group.

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
You need to recommend a certificate for the Lync Server 2010 d eployment that meets the companys remote user requirements. What should you include in the recommendation?

A. Deploy a certificate from the internal CA to the external interface of the Edge Server.
B. Deploy a certificate from a trusted third-party CA to the external interface of the Edge Server.
C. Deploy a certificate from the internal CA to the Mediation Servers.
D. Deploy a certificate from a trusted third-party CA to the Mediation Servers.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-665 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-667 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-667 Microsoft it-exams

70-667 Microsoft SharePoint Server 2010, Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-667 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have a SharePoint Server 2010 server farm.

The farm contains the servers configured as shown in the following table:

Server1 Database
Server2 Web, query
Server3 Crawl

You discover that the average CPU utilization on Server3 is 70 percent. You configure a server named Server4 as a crawl server.

You discover that the average CPU utilization on Server3 is still 70 percent. You need to reduce CPU utilization on Server3.

What should you do?

A. Create a new search scope.
B. Add a new crawl database.
C. Add a new crawl component.
D. Add the query component to Server4.

Answer: C

Explanation/Reference:
BURGOS MNEMO: "Add a new crawl component"

You can distribute the crawl load by adding crawl components to different farm servers.

Add or remove a crawl component (Search Server 2010)
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff428094.aspx



QUESTION 2
You have a SharePoint Server 2010 server farm.

The farm contains the servers configured as shown in the following table:

Server1 Database
Server2 Web, query
Server3 Crawl

You need to ensure that users can perform searches if a single server fails.

What should you do?

A. Add a new SharePoint Server 2010 server to the server farm.
Configure the new server as a crawl server.
B. Add a new SharePoint Server 2010 server to the server farm.
Remove the query component from Server2 and configure the new server as a query server.
C. Add two new SharePoint Server 2010 servers to the server farm.
Configure one server as a Web server and as a query server. Configure the other server as a
crawl server.
D. Add a new database server to the server farm and configure database mirroring.
Add a new SharePoint Server 2010 server to the server farm and configure the server as a
Web server and as a query server.

Answer: D

Explanation/Reference:
BURGOS MNEMO: "database mirroring"



QUESTION 3
You have a Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007 Service Pack 1 (SP1) server farm.

All servers in the farm run the 64-bit version of windows server 2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2).

You plan to perform an in-place upgrade to SharePoint Server 2010.

You need to ensure that you can successfully run the SharePoint Server 2010 Pre-Upgrade Checker.

What should you do?

A. Install Windows PowerShell 2.0 on all servers in the farm.
B. From Central Administration, select the Quiesce farm option.
C. Upgrade all SharePoint servers to Windows Server 2008 and install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0.
D. Install Windows SharePoint Services 3.0 Service Pack 2 (SP2) and SharePoint Server 2007 SP2
on all SharePoint servers.

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-667 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-668 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-668 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-668 PRO: Microsoft SharePoint 2010,Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-668 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You have a SharePoint Server 2010 server farm. The farm contains two Web servers. The load between the two Web servers is distributed by using DNS round robin. You need to ensure that the farm is available for all users if one of the Web servers fails. What should you do?

A. Configure alternate access mappings.
B. Implement Windows Network Load Balancing.
C. Configure netmask ordering.
D. Add a new Web server to the farm.

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
Q014
BURGOS MNEMO: "DNS round robin" ... "if one of the Web servers fails" = "NLB"

BURGOS COMMENTS:
About "NLB" in Q009, Q014, Q058:
IF "distributed across" only THEN Sandboxed
IF cluster solution for Web THEN "NLB",
IF for SQL THEN Failover Cluster

ORIGINAL COMMENTS:
Since DNS round robin is used to distribute the load to each of the servers, you should configure NLB and add the two Web servers to the NLB cluster group.


QUESTION 2
You plan to implement SharePoint Server 2010 on your company's intranet. The company has a custom application that contains the contact information of all users. You need to ensure that you can use the contact information to create custom audiences. What should you implement?

A. The Managed Metadata Service and the User Profile Service
B. Business Connectivity Services and the User Profile Service
C. Business Connectivity Services and Access Services
D. Access Services and the User Profile Service

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
Q015
BURGOS MNEMO: "create custom audiences" = "BCS / User Profile Service"

BURGOS COMMENTS:
About 2 services ("BCS", "UPS," "SSS") in Q015, Q077:
IF "BCS" stand alone THEN other
ELSE ALWAYS "BCS" with
IF "SSS" THEN is this
ELSE "UPS"
About "MMS" in Q015, Q030, Q055, Q067, Q070:
IF "Taxonomy" or "Reserarch department": THEN "MMS".
IF HAVE "create custom audiences" THEN is this instead of "MMS".
About "UPS" in Q015, Q017, Q064, Q077, Q093:
IF HAVE TOGETHER ("BCS" and "SSS") OR HAVE "Disassociate the extranet" THEN is this
ELSE "UPS" (with "BCS" if have two services)


ORIGINAL COMMENTS:
The fact that the company uses a custom application that contains contact information leads to using Business Connectivity Services. Being able to create audiences is done by using the User Profile Service.


QUESTION 3
You plan to implement a SharePoint Server 2010 server farm. The farm will be used to store documents that are as much as 100 MB. You need to recommend a search solution to meet the following requirements:

- Provide security-trimmed search results.
- Provide thumbnail previews of search results.
- Provide the ability to filter searches by using metadata.
- Minimize costs.

What should you recommend?

A. Microsoft SQL Server Full-Text Search
B. Microsoft Search Server Express
C. Microsoft FAST Search Server
D. Microsoft SharePoint search server

Answer: C

Explanation/Reference:
Q016
BURGOS MNEMO: = "Microsoft FAST Search Server"

ORIGINAL COMMENTS:
Because of the need the be able to filter searches by using metadata, the only applicable solution is using FAST Search Server.


QUESTION 4
You have a SharePoint Server 2010 server farm. You plan to implement My Sites. You need to recommend a solution that prevents personal profile data from appearing in search results. What should you recommend?

A. User Profile Services policies
B. Information management policies
C. Audiences
D. Access Services

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-668 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-669 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-669 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-669 TS:Windows Server 2008 R2, Desktop Virtualiazation our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-669 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You work as a network administrator at ABC.com. The ABC.com network consists of an Active Directory Domain Services domain named ABC.com. All servers on the network run Windows Server 2008 R2. All client computers run Windows 7 Enterprise.

The ABC.com virtualization environment includes Remote Desktop Services, Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 4.6 and Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Virtualization (MED-V).

Members of the ABC.com Sales team use portable computers and often work away from the office.

You want to create a virtualized application package that contains two Sales applications. The Sales applications require authorization to run and will need to be available for offline use for the roaming Sales users.

Which three of the following steps describe how you should create the virtualized Sales application package? (Choose three. Each answer represents part of the solution).

A. You should use MED-V to create the package.
B. You should use App-V to create the package.
C. You should install the applications on a Remote Desktop Session Host server.
D. You should configure the ApplicationSourceRoot registry key on each
client computer.
E. You should configure the AutoLoadTriggers, AutoLoadTarget
and RequireAuthorizationCached registry keys on each client computer.
F. Log in to each client computer as administrator and launch one of the
Sales applications.
G. Log in to each client computer as the Sales user and launch one of the
Sales applications.

Answer: BEG


QUESTION 2
You work as a network administrator at ABC.com. The company has offices in New York, Seattle and Toronto. All three offices are part of a single Active Directory Domain Services domain named ABC.com. All servers run Windows Server 2008 R2 and all client computers run Windows 7 Enterprise.

All three offices are connected to each other by slow WAN links.

Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V) 4.6 is used in each office to virtualize applications. Sequencing is performed by Desktop Technicians in each office and users stream virtual applications from a local file server.

How can you configure the file servers to replicate virtual applications between the three offices and minimize the WAN link bandwidth usage?

A. By installing the Distributed File System (DFS) and DFS Replication roles on
each file server and adding the servers to a full mesh replication group.
B. By configuring the Active Directory Site Links to allow replication only outside
office hours.
C. By installing the Distributed File System (DFS) role on each file server
and configuring each file server as a DFS root.
D. By installing the Distributed File System (DFS) role on each file server
and configuring the File Replication Service (FRS) to replicate the files.

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-669 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-663 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-663 Microsoft it-exams

70-663 Pro: Designing and Deploying Messaging Solutions with Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-663 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
A corporate environment includes Exchange Server 2010. Users currently access mailboxes remotely by using Outlook Web App (OWA). You need to recommend a method of identifying the browser types and versions used to access OWA.

What should you recommend?

A. Analyze the message tracking log files.
B. Analyze the IIS log files.
C. Run the Exchange Remote Connectivity Analyzer.
D. Run the Tracking Log Explorer.

Answer: B
Section: Designing and Deploying Messaging Compliance, System Monitoring, and Reporting



QUESTION 2
A corporate environment includes an on-premise deployment of Exchange Server 2010 SP1. The company intends to migrate to a cloud-based Exchange Server 2010 SP1 service.

The security team needs to perform the following tasks:

Search multiple mailboxes for messages that meet specific criteria.
Store search results in a specific mailbox.
You need to recommend a solution for enabling security team members to perform the tasks.

To which group should you recommend the security team members be assigned?

A. the Domain Admins security group
B. the Discovery Management role-based access control (RBAC) role group
C. the Enterprise Admins security group
D. the Records Management role-based access control (RBAC) role group

Answer: B
Section: Designing and Deploying Messaging Compliance, System Monitoring, and Reporting



QUESTION 3
A corporate environment includes Exchange Server 2010. The Exchange Server environment includes one Mailbox server, one Client Access server, one Hub Transport server, and one Edge Transport server.

You need to recommend a solution for inserting specific text in every email message as it is sent.

What should you recommend?

A. Create a transport rule on the Hub Transport server.
B. Create a send connector on the Hub Transport server.
C. Create a transport rule by using an Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) template.
D. Create a transport rule on the Edge Transport server.

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-663 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-664 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-664 Microsoft it-exams

70-664 TS: Microsoft Lync Server 2010, Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-664 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
Your network contains a server named Server1 that tuns Windows Server 2008 R2.
You plan to install the Lync Server 2010 Topology Builder on Server1.
You need to install the required prerequisites for the planned installation.
What should you Install first?

A. Background Intelligent Transfer Services (BITS)
B. Microsoft.NET Framework 3.5.1 Features
C. Remote Server Administration Toots (RSAT)
D. Windows Internal Database

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/gg398686.aspx

http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/gg425929.aspx



QUESTION 2
Your network contains the following components:

• Three routers
• Five subnets
▪ Eight domain controllers
• Five Active Directory sites
• Two wireless access points (WAPs)
• One Lync Server 2010 server

You plan to support location information services and create a network wiremap.
You need to identify which elements must be used in the wiremap.
Which two elements should you identify? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Active Directory sites
B. Domain controllers
C. Routers
D. Subnets
E. WAPs

Answer: DE

Explanation/Reference:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/gg398364.aspx



QUESTION 3
Your network has Lync Server 2010 deployed.
You deploy a Front End Server in a pool that contains two servers.
You configure DNS load balancing for the pool.
You need to configure a hardware load balancer to redirect connections to the pool.
Which two protocols should you redirect on the hardware load balancer? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Centralized Conference Control Protocol (C3P)
B. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
C. Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)
D. Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE)
E. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

Answer: BC

Practicetest 70-664 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-656 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-656 Microsoft it-exams

70-656 TS:Microsoft Desktop Optimization Pack,Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-656 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You are configuring an Application Virtualization Sequencer. You need to ensure that the Sequencer will be compatible with Application Virtualization Desktop Clients that were installed using the default drive letter. What should you do?

A. Use the Assign command on the Sequencer to map drive Q to drive V.
B. Create a Group Policy object (GPO) to map a network drive.
C. Create a separate partition on the Sequencer and assign it drive letter V.
D. Create a separate partition on the Sequencer and assign it drive letter Q.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
You create a test environment for an application that has an existing package. You need to create a new application package
that is identical to the existing application package and that is configured to point to the test environment. You need to ensure that users are able to run both packages simultaneously. You open the existing package in the Application Virtualization Sequencer. What should you do next?

A. Branch the existing package, and change the name of the application shortcut. Modify the
shortcut to point to the test environment.
B. Branch the existing package, and modify the branched package to point to the test environment.
C. Perform an active upgrade to change the name of the application shortcut, and modify the
shortcut to point to the test environment.
D. Perform an active upgrade, and modify the package to point to the test environment.

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
You have a custom application named App1 that is deployed to all users. The vendor releases an update to App1. You need to sequence the update as an upgrade for a test group of users without impacting current users of App1. What should you do first?

A. Use the Application Wizard to re-sequence the application.
B. Use the Save As New Package command to save App1 in a new folder.
C. Use the Application Virtualization Sequencer to modify the version of App1.
D. Use the Application Virtualization Sequencer to modify the paths for the application files.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-656 Microsoft it-exams

MB7-842

MB7-842 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com MB7-842 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification MB7-842 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass MB7-842 Exam it-exams.com MB7-842 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the MB7-842 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your MB7-842 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions MB7-842 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online MB7-842 preparation materials, through the MB7-842 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com MB7-842 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With MB7-842 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com MB7-842 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-659 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-659 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-659 TS: Windows Server 2008 R2, Server Virtualization our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-659 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You use Microsoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) 2008 R2 to perform physical -to- virtual (P2V) conversion s . Your companys network includes computers that each run one of the following operating systems : Windows NT 4.0 Server with SP6a Windows 2000 Server with SP4 Windows Server 2003 with SP2 Windows Web Server 2008 R2 You need to choose the operating systems that can be converted by using the online P2V method.

Which two operating systems should you choose? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)


A. Windows NT 4.0 Server with SP6a
B. Windows 2000 Server with SP4
C. Windows Server 2003 with SP2
D. Windows Web Server 2008 R2

Answer: CD



QUESTION 2
Your virtual environment includes Windows Server 2008 R2 Hyper-V servers. You are deploying a Remote Desktop Pool. You need to choose an operating system for the virtual machines (VMs) in the pool. Which two operating systems will achieve this goal? (Each correct answer presents a complete solution. Choose two.)

A. Windows Vista Enterprise
B. Windows 7 Enterprise
C. Windows Server 2008
D. Windows Server 2008 R2

Answer: AB



QUESTION 3
Your environment includes Hyper-V and VMware ESX. You manage your virtual environment by using Microsoft System Center Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) 2008 R2. You plan to perform a virtual-to-virtual (V2V) conversion of a virtual machine (VM) that is located on the ESX server.
You start the conversion by using the Convert Virtual Machine Wizard. Communication between the destination host and the ESX server fails, and the conversion does not finish successfully. You need to ensure that the conversion finishes successfully.
What should you change?

A. WSMan permissions and settings
B. Server Message Block (SMB) settings
C. Secure Shell (SSH) and HTTPS settings
D. Windows Firewall exceptions for Background Intelligent Transfer Service (BITS)

Answer: C

Practicetest 70-659 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-662 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-662 Microsoft it-exams

70-662 TS: Microsoft Exchange Server our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-662 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
You install a new Exchange Server 2010 server.
You need to ensure that users can connect from the Internet to the server by using Exchange ActiveSync. What should you do on the Exchange server?

A. Modify the internal URL for the Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync virtual directory.
B. Modify the external URL for the Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync virtual directory.
C. Enable Anonymous Authentication for the Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync virtual directory.
D. Enable Windows Integrated Authentication for the Microsoft-Server-ActiveSync virtual directory.

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
Your network contains one Exchange Server 2010 Client Access server named Server1. You have a user named User1.
You need to limit the size of the attachments that User1 can download by using Exchange ActiveSync. The solution must not affect other users.
What should you do first?

A. Create new managed content settings.
B. Modify the message size restrictions for User1.
C. Create a new Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy.
D. Modify the default Exchange ActiveSync mailbox policy.

Answer: C



QUESTION 3
You have an Active Directory domain named contoso.com. You have an Exchange Server 2010 organization that contains a Client Access server named CAS1. Users connect to CAS1 from the Internet by using mail.contoso.com. The organization contains the following mobile clients:
·Windows Mobile 5.0
·Windows Mobile 6.1
·Windows Mobile 6.5
You plan to install a certificate on CAS1.
You need to ensure that all clients can connect to CAS1 from the Internet by using Exchange ActiveSync. Which name should you include in the certificate?

A. *.contoso.com
B. CAS1.contoso.com
C. EAS.contoso.com
D. mail.contoso.com

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-662 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-647 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-647 Microsoft it-exams

70-647 Windows Server 2008,Enterprise Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-647 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
Testlet 14 Trey Research
Question 2 of 5

You need to recommend a technology that meets the company's security requirements.

What should you recommend?

A. Microsoft Forefront Endpoint Protection 2010
B. Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS)
C. Active Directory Management Gateway Service
D. Microsoft Forefront Identity Manager (FIM) 2010

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
Testlet 14 Trey Research
Question 3 of 5

You need to ensure that the migration of the user accounts from adatum.com and east.adatum.com to treyresearch.com meets the company's technical requirements.

Which two actions should you perform? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Enable name suffix routing.
B. Disable SID filtering for the forest trust.
C. Create an external trust between the two forests,
D. Enable SID filtering for the forest trust.
E. Disable name suffix routing.
F. Enable SID History for each migrated user account.
G. Disable SID History for each migrated user account.

Answer: BF



QUESTION 3
Testlet 14 Trey Research
Question 4 of 5

You need to recommend an access solution for the users who work at home that meets the company's technical requirements.

What should you include in the recommendation?

A. Microsoft Enterprise Desktop Visualization (MED-V)
B. Microsoft Application Virtualization (App-V)
C. DirectAccess
D. Remote Desktop Services (RDS)

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-647 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-648 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-648 Microsoft it-exams

70-648 TS: Upgrading MCSA on Windows serv 2003 to Windows Serv 2008 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-648 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
Your network contains a single Active Directory domain. All servers run Windows Server 2008 R2. A DHCP server is deployed on the network and configured to provide IPv6 prefixes.

You need to ensure that when you monitor network traffic, you see the interface identifiers derived from the Extended Unique Identifier (EUI)-64 address.

Which command should you run?

A. netsh.exe interface ipv6 set global addressmaskreply=disabled
B. netsh.exe interface ipv6 set global dhcpmediasense=enabled
C. netsh.exe interface ipv6 set global randomizeidentifiers=disabled
D. netsh.exe interface ipv6 set privacy state=enabled

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
Your company uses DHCP to lease IPv4 addresses to computers at the main office. A WAN link connects the main office to a branch office. All computers in the branch office are configured with static IP addresses. The branch office does not use DHCP and uses a different subnet.

You need to ensure that the portable computers can connect to network resources at the main office and the branch office.

How should you configure each portable computer?

A. Use a static IPv4 address in the range used at the branch office.
B. Use an alternate configuration that contains a static IP address in the range used at
the main office.
C. Use the address that was assigned by the DHCP server as a static IP address.
D. Use an alternate configuration that contains a static IP address in the range used at the
branch office.

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
You have a DHCP server named Server1 and an application server named Server2. Both servers run Windows Server 2008 R2. The DHCP server contains one scope.

You need to ensure that Server2 always receives the same IP address. Server2 must receive its DNS settings and its WINS settings from DHCP.

What should you do?

A. Create a multicast scope.
B. Assign a static IP address to Server2.
C. Create an exclusion range in the DHCP scope.
D. Create a DHCP reservation in the DHCP scope.

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-648 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-649 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-649 Microsoft it-exams

70-649 TS: Upgrading Your MCSE on Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2008,Technology Specialist our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-649 Microsoft it-exams


QUESTION 1
Your company has a network that has 100 servers. A server named Server1 is configured as
a file server.
Server1 is connected to a SAN and has 15 logical drives. You want to automatically run a data
archiving script if the free space on any of the logical drives is below 30 percent.
You need to automate the script execution.
You create a new Data Collector Set. What should you do next?
A. Add the Event trace data collector.
B. Add the Performance counter alert.
C. Add the Performance counter data collector.
D. Add the System configuration information data collector.
Answer: B
Explanation/Reference:
Explanation:
Refer to below Step by step guide:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc722414.aspx

QUESTION 2
Your company has an Active Directory domain that has two domain controllers named DC1
and DC2. You prepare both servers to support event subscriptions. On DC1, you create a
new default subscription for DC2. You need to review system events for DC2.
Which event log should you select?
A. system log on DC1
B. application log on DC2
C. Forwarded Events log on DC1
D. Forwarded Events log on DC2
Answer: C

QUESTION 3
Your company has a network that has an Active Directory domain. The domain has two
servers named DC1 and DC2.
You plan to collect events from DC2 and transfer them to DC1. You configure the required
subscriptions by selecting the Normal option for the Event delivery optimization setting and by
using the HTTP protocol.
You discover that none of the subscriptions work.
You need to ensure that the servers support the event collectors. Which three actions should
you perform? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose three.)
A. Run the wecutil qc command on DC1.
B. Run the wecutil qc command on DC2.
C. Run the winrm quickconfig command on DC1.
D. Run the winrm quickconfig command on DC2.
E. Add the DC2 account to the Administrators group on DC1.
F. Add the DC1 account to the Administrators group on DC2.
Answer: ADF

Practicetest 70-649 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-646 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-646 Microsoft it-exams

70-646 Windows Server 2008,Server Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-646 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
Lucerne Publishing

You need to recommend a solution for managing the service accounts for SQL1 and SQL2. The solution must meet the company's security requirements.

What should you include in the recommendation?

A. a custom password filter
B. a Password Settings object (PSO)
C. managed service accounts
D. manual password changes

Answer: D
Section: Testlet: Lucerne Publishing



QUESTION 2
Lucerne Publishing

You need to recommend a solution to minimize the amount of time it takes for users in the Boston office to log on to their client computers.

What should you include in the recommendation?

A. accessbased enumeration (ABE)
B. folder redirection
C. the Active Directory site link cost
D. universal group membership caching

Answer: B
Section: Testlet: Lucerne Publishing

Explanation/Reference:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc732275.aspx

Folder Redirection

User settings and user files are typically stored in the local user profile, under the Users folder. The files in local user profiles can be accessed only from the current computer, which makes it difficult for users who use more than one computer to work with their data and synchronize settings between multiple computers. Two technologies exist to address this problem: Roaming Profiles and Folder Redirection. Both technologies have their advantages, and they can be used separately or together to create a seamless user experience from one computer to another. They also provide additional options for administrators managing user data.


QUESTION 3
Lucerne Publishing

You need to recommend changes to the infrastructure to ensure that DFS meets the company's security requirements. What should you include in the recommendation?

A. Upgrade DFS2 to Windows Server 2008 R2.
B. Implement accessbased enumeration (ABE).
C. Implement Authentication Mechanism Assurance.
D. Configure the DFS namespace to use Windows Server 2008 mode.

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-646 Microsoft it-exams

VCP-410

VCP-410 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com VCP-410 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification VCP-410 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass VCP-410 Exam it-exams.com VCP-410 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the VCP-410 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your VCP-410 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions VCP-410 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online VCP-410 preparation materials, through the VCP-410 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com VCP-410 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With VCP-410 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com VCP-410 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

MB7-841

MB7-841 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com MB7-841 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification MB7-841 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass MB7-841 Exam it-exams.com MB7-841 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the MB7-841 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your MB7-841 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions MB7-841 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online MB7-841 preparation materials, through the MB7-841 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com MB7-841 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With MB7-841 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com MB7-841 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

VCP-510

VCP-510 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com VCP-510 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification VCP-510 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass VCP-510 Exam it-exams.com VCP-510 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the VCP-510 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your VCP-510 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions VCP-510 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online VCP-510 preparation materials, through the VCP-510 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com VCP-510 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With VCP-510 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com VCP-510 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Mittwoch, 26. Dezember 2012

Danke Meiner Mutter und meinem Vater.

Danke Meiner Mutter und meinem Vater. Ich liebe euch.

Ich bekomme viele Geschenke!!

Ich bekomme viele Geschenke...:)

Practicetest 70-643 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-643 Microsoft it-exams
70-643 Windows Server 2008 Applications Infrastructure,Configuringn our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-643 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
Your network contains an Active Directory domain named fabrikam.com. The domain contains a Web server named Web1 that runs Windows Server 2008 R2.

You have a Web site named Corp. The content on Corp is stored on a FAT32 partition. Corp contains a Web page named Test.html.

You need to ensure that only a user named Devi can access Test.html from the Corp Web site. All of the other content on Corp must be accessible to everyone.

Which feature should you configure?


A. Feature Delegation
B. Authorization Rules
C. IP Address and Domain Restrictions
D. Manager Permissions

Answer: B
Section: Internet Information Server (IIS)




QUESTION 2
Your network contains an Active Directory domain named fabnkam.com. The domain contains a Web server named Web1 that runs Windows Server 2008 R2.

You create a new site named Site1.

You need to prevent Web1 from accepting HTTP URLs that are longer than 1,024 bytes.

Which feature should you configure?

A. Connection Strings
B. Authorization Rules
C. Request Filtering
D. HTTP Response Headers

Answer: C
Section: Internet Information Server (IIS)




QUESTION 3
Your network contains a Web server named Server1 that runs Windows Server 2008 R2. Server1 has four application pools.

You need to view a list of the CPU and memory resources used by each application pool.

Which feature should you configure from internet Information Services (IIS) Manager?

A. Request Filtering
B. Error Pages
C. SSL Settings

D. Default Document
E. ISAPI and CGI Restrictions
F. HTTP Response Headers
G. Feature Delegation
H. Authentication
I. IIS Manager Permissions
J. Connection Strings
K. IP Address and Domain Restrictions
L. Management Service
M. HTTP Redirect
N. worker Processes
O. ISAPI Filters
P. Authorization Rules

Answer: N

Practicetest 70-643 Microsoft it-exams

Einen schoenen Tag!

Einen schoenen Tag!

JN0-343

JN0-343 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com JN0-343 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification JN0-343 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass JN0-343 Exam it-exams.com JN0-343 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the JN0-343 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your JN0-343 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions JN0-343 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online JN0-343 preparation materials, through the JN0-343 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com JN0-343 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With JN0-343 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com JN0-343 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

CSSBB

CSSBB exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com CSSBB braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification CSSBB certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass CSSBB Exam it-exams.com CSSBB braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the CSSBB exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your CSSBB score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions CSSBB trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online CSSBB preparation materials, through the CSSBB exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com CSSBB Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With CSSBB Questions and Answers, it-exams.com CSSBB gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

650-987

650-987 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 650-987 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 650-987 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 650-987 Exam it-exams.com 650-987 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 650-987 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 650-987 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 650-987 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 650-987 preparation materials, through the 650-987 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 650-987 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 650-987 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 650-987 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

A00-260

A00-260 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com A00-260 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification A00-260 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass A00-260 Exam it-exams.com A00-260 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the A00-260 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your A00-260 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions A00-260 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online A00-260 preparation materials, through the A00-260 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com A00-260 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With A00-260 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com A00-260 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-640 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-640 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-640 Windows Server 2008 Active Directory.Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-640 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
Your network contains an Active Directory domain named contoso.com.

You have an organizational unit (OU) named Sales and an OU named Engineering.

You have two Group Policy Objects (GPOs) named GPO1 and GPO2. GPO1 and GPO2 are linked to the Sales OU and contain multiple settings.

You discover that GPO2 has a setting that conflicts with a setting in GPO1. When the policies are applied, the setting in GPO2 takes effect.

You need to ensure that the settings in GPO1 supersede the settings in GPO2. The solution must ensure that all non-conflicting settings in both GPOs are applied.

What should you do?

A. Configure Restricted Groups.
B. Configure the link order.
C. Link the GPO to the Sales OU.
D. Link the GPO to the Engineer OU.
E. Enable loopback processing in merge mode.
F. Modify the Group Policy permissions.
G. Configure WMI filtering.
H. Configure Group Policy Permissions.
I. Enable loopback processing in replace mode.
J. Enable block inheritance.

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc757050(v=ws.10).aspx#BKMK_change


QUESTION 2
All vendors belong to a global group named vendors.

You place three file servers in a new organizational unit (OU) named ConfidentialFileServers. The three file servers contain confidential data located in shared folders.

You need to record any failed attempts made by the vendors to access the confidential data.

Which two actions should you perform? (Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Create a new Group Policy Object (GPO) and link it to the CONFIDENTIALFILESERVERS
OU. Configure the Audit object access failure audit policy setting.
B. Create a new Group Policy Object (GPO) and link it to the CONFIDENTIALFILESERVERS
OU. Configure the Audit privilege use Failure audit policy setting.
C. On each shared folder on the three file servers, add the Vendors global group to the Auditing tab.
Configure Failed Full control setting in the AuditingEntry dialog box.
D. On each shared folder on the three file servers, add the three servers to the Auditing tab.
Configure Failed Full control setting in the AuditingEntry dialog box.
E. Create a new Group Policy Object (GPO) and link it to the CONFIDENTIALFILESERVERS
OU. Configure the Deny access to this computer from the network user rights setting for the
Vendors global group.

Answer: AC


QUESTION 3
A corporate network includes a single Active Directory Domain Services (AD DS) domain.

The HR department has a dedicated organizational unit (OU) named HR. The HR OU has two sub-OUs: HR Users and HR Computers. User accounts for the HR department reside in the HR Users OU. Computer accounts for the HR department reside in the HR Computers OU. All HR department employees belong to a security group named HR Employees. All HR department computers belong to a security group named HR PCs.

Company policy requires that passwords are a minimum of 6 characters.

You need to ensure that, the next time HR department employees change their passwords, the passwords are required to have at least 8 characters. The password length requirement should not change for employees of any other department.

What should you do?

A. Modify the password policy in the GPO that is applied to the domain.
B. Create a new GPO, with the necessary password policy, and link it to the HR Users OU.
C. Create a fine-grained password policy and apply it to the HR Users OU.
D. Modify the password policy in the GPO that is applied to the domain controllers OU.

Answer: C

Practicetest 70-640 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-642 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-642 Microsoft it-exams

70-642 TS: Windows Server 2008 Network Infrastructure, Configuring Certification our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-642 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You perform a security audit of a server named DC1. You install the Microsoft Network
Monitor 3.0 application on DC1.
You plan to capture all the LDAP traffic that comes to and goes from the server between
20:00 and 07:00 the next day and save it to the E:\data.cap file.
You create a scheduled task. You add a new Start a program action to the task. You need to
add the application name and the application arguments to the new action.
What should you do?
A. Add nmcap.exe as the application name. Add the /networks * /capture LDAP /file e:\data.cap
/stopwhen / timeafter 11hours line as arguments.
B. Add netmon.exe as the application name. Add the /networks */capture LDAP /file e:\data.cap
/stopwhen / timeafter 11hours line as arguments.
C. Add nmcap.exe as the application name. Add the /networks * /capture !LDAP /file e:\data.cap
/ stopwhen / timeafter 11hours line as arguments.
D. Add nmconfig.exe as the application name. Add the /networks * /capture &LDAP /file e:\data.cap
/ stopwhen /timeafter 11hours line as arguments.
Answer: A

QUESTION 2
Your network contains a server named Server1 that runs a Server Core installation of
Windows Server 2008 R2. Server1 is configured as a DNS server. You need to ensure that
Server1 only resolves name queries from IPv6 clients. What should you do?
A. Run netsh.exe and specify the dnsclient parameter.
B. Run dnscmd.exe and specify the /config parameter.
C. Run dnscmd.exe and specify the /resetlistenaddresses parameter.
D. Run netsh.exe and specify the interface parameter.

Answer: C

Explanation/Reference:
To configure your DNS server to listen over IPv6, do the following:
Install Windows Support Tools.
For more information, see Install Windows Support Tools Open Command Prompt.
Type the following command:
dnscmd /config /EnableIPv6 1
Restart the DNS Server service.
For more information, see Start or stop a DNS server.
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc783049(WS.10).aspx

QUESTION 238
Your network contains an Active Directory forest. The forest contains two domains named
contoso.com and corp.nwtraders.com. The network contains a Web server named
server1.contoso.com. All client computers run Windows 7. You need to ensure that users in
corp.nwtraders.com can connect to server1.contoso.com by using http://server1. What should
you do?
A. From the Default Domain Policy Group Policy object (GPO) of corp.nwtraders.com,
configure Primary DNS Suffix Devolution.
B. From the Default Domain Policy Group Policy object (GPO) of corp.nwtraders.com,
modify the DNS suffix search list.
C. From the DNS servers in corp.nwtraders.com, configure a conditional forwarder
for contoso.com.
D. From the DNS servers in corp.nwtraders.com, configure a root hint for contoso.com.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-642 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-569 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-569 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-569 Upgrade: Transition your MCPD Enterprise Application Developer Skills to MCPD Enterprise Applications Developer 3.5, Part 2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-569 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are creating a Windows Forms application by using the .NET Framework 3.5. You
create a new form in your application. You add a PrintDocument control named pntDoc to
the form.To support the print functionality, you write the following code segment in the
application. (Line numbers are included for reference only.)
01 pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler(PrintDoc_BeginPrint);
02 ...
03 bool canPrint = CheckPrintAccessControl();
04 if (!canPrint) {
05
06 }
07
You need to ensure that the following requirements are met:
When the user has no print access, font and file stream initializations are not
executed and the print operation is cancelled.
Print operations are logged whether or not the user has print access.
What should you do?

A. Add the following code segment at line 05.
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler(PrintDoc_BeginPrint);
pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler((obj, args) => args.Cancel = true);
Add the following code segment at line 07.
pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler((obj1, args1) => LogPrintOperation());
B. Add the following code segment at line 05.
pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler(delegate(object obj, PrintEventArgs args){});
Add the following code segment at line 07.
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler(PrintDoc_BeginPrint);
pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler((obj1, args1) => LogPrintOperation());
C. Add the following code segment at line 05.
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler(PrintDoc_BeginPrint);
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler(delegate(object obj, PrintEventArgs args){});
Add the following code segment at line 07.
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler((obj1, args1) => LogPrintOperation());
D. Add the following code segment at line 05.
pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler((obj, args) => args.Cancel = true);
Add the following code segment at line 07.
pntDoc.BeginPrint += new PrintEventHandler(PrintDoc_BeginPrint);

pntDoc.BeginPrint -= new PrintEventHandler((obj1, args1) => LogPrintOperation());

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
You create an application by using the Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 and Microsoft
ADO.NET. The application connects to a Microsoft SQL Server 2005 database.You write
the following code segment. (Line numbers are included for reference only.)
01 using (SqlConnection connection = new SqlConnection(connectionString)) {
02 SqlCommand cmd = new SqlCommand(queryString, connection);
03 connection.Open();
04
05 while (sdrdr.Read()){
06 // use the data in the reader
07 }
08 }
You need to ensure that the memory is used efficiently when retrieving BLOBs from the
database.Which code segment should you insert at line 04?

A. SqlDataReader sdrdr = cmd.ExecuteReader();
B. SqlDataReader sdrdr = cmd.ExecuteReader(CommandBehavior.Default);
C. SqlDataReader sdrdr = cmd.ExecuteReader(CommandBehavior.SchemaOnly);
D. SqlDataReader sdrdr = cmd.ExecuteReader(CommandBehavior.SequentialAccess);

Answer: D

Explanation/Reference:
Sequential Access is the most efficient for retrieval of BLOB data types.

http://www.akadia.com/services/dotnet_read_write_blob.html


QUESTION 3
You are creating a Windows Forms application by using the .NET Framework 3.5. You write
a code segment to connect to a Microsoft Access database and populate a DataSet.You need
to ensure that the application meets the following requirements:
It displays all database exceptions.
It logs all other exceptions by using the LogExceptionToFile.
Which code segment should you use?

A. try
{
categoryDataAdapter.Fill(dsCategory);
}
catch (SqlException ex)
{
MessageBox.Show(ex.Message, "Exception");
LogExceptionToFile(ex.Message);
}
B. try
{
categoryDataAdapter.Fill(dsCategory);
}
catch (SqlException ex)
{
MessageBox.Show(ex.Message, "Exception");
}
catch (Exception ex)
{ LogExceptionToFile(ex.Message);
}
C. try
{
categoryDataAdapter.Fill(dsCategory);
}
catch (OleDbException ex)
{
MessageBox.Show(ex.Message, "Exception");
}

catch (Exception ex)
{ LogExceptionToFile(ex.Message);
}
D. try
{
categoryDataAdapter.Fill(dsCategory);
}
catch (OleDbException ex)
{
MessageBox.Show(ex.Message, "Exception"); LogExceptionToFile(ex.Message);
}

Answer: C

Practicetest 70-569 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-573 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-573 Microsoft it-exams

70-573 TS: Office SharePoint Server, Application Development (available in 2010) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-573 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You need to create a custom Web Part that meets the following requirements:

Includes all of the functionalities of the Search Results Web Part
Includes additional filters based on the current user department

What should you do?

A. Create a Web Part that inherits the CoreResultsWebPart class.
B. Create a Web Part that inherits the SearchResultsBaseDatasource class.
C. Modify the SearchDisco.aspx page and modify the descriptor file for the Search Summary Web Part.
D. Modify the SearchDisco.aspx page and modify the descriptor file for the Search Core Results Web Part.

Answer: A

Explanation/Reference:
MNEMONIC RULE: "Search Results Web Part = CoreResultsWebPart"
Specifies the user interface (UI) control that displays the results for a search query in the SharePoint Enterprise Search UI
CoreResultsWebPart Class
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/microsoft.office.server.search.webcontrols.coreresultswebpart.aspx


QUESTION 2
You are creating a custom content type named CT1.

You need to use a Feature to add an existing site column named SiteCol1 to CT1.

Which code segment should you include in the Feature?

A.
B.
C.
D.

Answer: D

Explanation/Reference:
MNEMONIC RULE: "existing Field needs to be Referenced"
FieldRef Element (ContentType)
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/aa543225.aspx


QUESTION 3
You need to create a custom content type and specify the content type ID.

What should you do?

A. Create a new module.
B. Create a custom Feature.
C. Call the Lists Web service.
D. Call the Webs Web service.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-573 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-595 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-595 Microsoft it-exams

70-595 TS: Developing Business Process and Integration Solutions by Using Microsoft BizTalk Server 2010 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-595 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are developing a BizTalk Server 2010 orchestration that consumes a web service located at http://localhost/ProcessData.asmx. The orchestration contains a non-transactional scope with an exception handler that handles any SOAP exceptions returned from the web service. The orchestration then completes successfully. After the orchestration completes with exceptions, you notice that the original messages posted to the web service are suspended in the BizTalk Administration console. You need to ensure that the messages are not suspended but are saved in an archive file on a shared server.
What should you do?

A. In the Administration console, modify the SOAP send port and enable routing for failed messages.
Create a FILE send port with filters ErrorReport.ErrorType==FailedMessage and ErrorReport.OutboundTransportLocation==http://localhost/ProcessData.asmx.
B. In Orchestration Designer, set Delivery Notification to Transmitted on the request/response port that sends the SOAP message. Create an exception handler with exception type DeliveryFailureException. In the handler, send a copy of the original message to a new send port that will transmit the message as a file.
C. In the Administration console, change the send pipeline to PassThruTransmit and enable Ordered delivery in the transport options.
D. In Orchestration Designer, modify the SOAP exception handler to send a copy of the original message to a new send port that will transmit the message as a file.

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
A BizTalk Server 2010 orchestration consumes a Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service. A request-response call to the WCF service is made inside a non-transactional scope. The scope has an exception handler that has its Exception Object Type property set to the type of the fault operation returned from the service. The handler receives the fault message. The WCF service throws a typed fault exception named WidgetException. You need to extract the exceptions detail node from thefault message. What should you do in the WCF send port configuration?

A. Set the Propagate Fault Message option to True. Specify the source of the outbound WCF message body by selecting Template. In the XML expression box, enter the XML of the WidgetException message.
B. Set the Propagate Fault Message option to True. Specify the source of the inbound BizTalk message body by selecting Path and entering the XPath expression for the WidgetException node.
C. Set the Propagate Fault Message option to True. Specify the source of the inbound WCF message body by selecting BizTalk Request Message Body.
D. Set the Propagate Fault Message option to True. Specify the source of the inbound BizTalk message body by selecting Envelope (soap:Envelope).

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
You are integrating BizTalk Server 2010 with a secure Microsoft Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service that does not have metadata exchange (MEX) enabled. The web service provider distributes an XML schema with a root node named SecretData without a namespace for the data provided by the web service. You generate a BizTalk schema based on the XML schema. You finish developing the application and deploy it for integration testing. When testing the service, you trace the messages received from the service. You see that the response message is within a single element named SecureResponse. SOAP elements wrap the response message and the SecureResponse element. You need to specify the inbound message body properties to ensure that the message can be received. What should you do?

A. Choose the Envelope option. Add the soapProcessing endpoint behavior with the property processMessages=True.
B. Choose the Path option. For the body path expression, specify /*[local-name()='SecureResponse']/*[local-name()='SecretData'].
C. Choose the Path option. For the body path expression, specify /*[local-name()='SecretData']. Add the soapProcessing endpoint behavior with the property processMessages=True.
D. Choose the Body option. Add the useRequestHeadersForMetadataAddress service behavior.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-595 Microsoft it-exams

000-419

000-419 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 000-419 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 000-419 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 000-419 Exam it-exams.com 000-419 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 000-419 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 000-419 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 000-419 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 000-419 preparation materials, through the 000-419 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 000-419 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 000-419 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 000-419 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-565 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-565 Microsoft it-exams

70-565 Pro: Designing and Developing Enterprise Applications Using the Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-565 Microsoft it-exams

Question: 1
You create a Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service by using Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2008 and the .NET Framework 3.5.
The service exposes two endpoints. The first endpoint is configured to use the Issued Tokens authentication method. The second endpoint is configured to use the Digital Certificates authentication method.
Additional endpoints along with different authentication mechanisms will be created in the future.
You plan to define the authorization strategy for the service.
You need to ensure that the WCF service meets the following requirements:
Authorization rules for validation are the same, regardless of the type of the user credential.
Users are prevented from executing restricted WCF operations.
Fine-grained authorization is provided to protected resources.
What should you do?

A. Use the System.Security.Permissions.PrincipalPermission class.
B. Use Identity Model to implement a claims-based authorization strategy.
C. Use the System.Security.Permissions.PrincipalPermissionAttribute attribute.
D. Use Windows Access Control Lists to implement a resource-based authorization strategy.

Answer: B


Question: 2
You create an application by using Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2008 and the .NET Framework 3.5. The application exposes a Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service. The service will be consumed by a client-side code that runs in the Web pages of an ASP.NET AJAX Web application. You need to ensure that data serialization between the service and the application incurs minimum latency. Which data format should you use?

A. Binary
B. JavaScript Object Notation
C. Extensible Markup Language
D. Really Simple Syndication 2.0

Answer: B

Question: 3
You create a Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) application by using Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 and the .NET Framework 3.5.
You create a WCF service by using the following code segment. (Line numbers are included for reference only.)
01 [ServiceContract]
02 public interface IContosoService
03 {
04 [OperationContract]
05
06 void ProcessTransaction();
07 }
08
09 public class ContosoService : IContosoService
10 {
11 public void ProcessTransaction() {
12 try {
13 BusinessComponent.ProcessTransaction();
14 }
15 catch (ApplicationException appEx) {
16
17 }
18 }
19 }
The BusinessComponent.ProcessTransaction method will only throw exceptions from the
ApplicationException type. You plan to debug the WCF service.
You need to ensure that the WCF service meets the following requirements:
Detailed exception information is provided to the client application.
Subsequent calls can be issued to the service by using the same proxy intance after an exception is caught in the client application.
What should you do?

A. Add the following code segment at line 08.
[ServiceBehavior(IncludeExceptionDetailInFaults=true)] Add the following code segment at line 16. throw appEx;
B. Add the following code segment at line 05. [FaultContract(typeof(ApplicationException))] Addthe following code segment at line 16. throw appEx;
C. Add the following code segment at line 08.
[ServiceBehavior(IncludeExceptionDetailInFaults=true)] Add the following code segment at line 16. throw new FaultException(appEx);
D. Add the following code segment at line 05. [FaultContract(typeof(ApplicationException))] Add the following code segment at line 16. throw new FaultException(appEx);
Answer: D

Practicetest 70-565 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-567 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-567 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-567 Transition your MCPD Web Developer Skills to MCPD ASP.NET Developer 3.5 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-567 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You create a Microsoft ASP.NET application by using the Microsoft .NET Framework version 3.5. You add a Web page named HomePage.aspx in the application. The Web page contains different controls. You add a newly created custom control named CachedControl to the Web page. You need to ensure that the following requirements are met:
*the custom control state remains static for one minute. *the custom control settings do not affect the cache settings of other elements in the Web page.
What should you do?
A.
Add the following code fragment to the Web.config file of the solution.

B.
Add the following code fragment to the Web.config file of the solution.

C.
Add a class named ProfileCache that inherits from the ConfigurationSection class to the HomePage.aspx.cs page. Add the following to the Web.config file of the solution.


D.
Add a class named ProfileCache that inherits from the ConfigurationSection class to the HomePage.aspx.cs page. Add the following code fragment to the Web.config file of the solution.

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
You are creating an ASP.NET application by using the .NET Framework 3.5. The application stores and retrieves sensitive data in a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 database. The database is accessed by multiple applications. You need to ensure that other applications that access the database are unable to view any sensitive data that is stored by the application. What should you do?

A.
Enable the Transparent Data encryption for the SQL Server database.

B.
Enable the secure sockets layer encryption for the SQL Server connections.

C.
Encrypt sensitive data by using the Secure Hash algorithm before storing it in the database.

D.
Encrypt sensitive data by using the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm before storing it in the database.

Answer: D


QUESTION 3
You are creating an ASP.NET application by using the .NET Framework 3.5. The application stores sensitive profile data in a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 database. You need to ensure that no profile data is stored in clear text. What should you do?
A.
Enable the secure sockets layer encryption for the SQL Server connections.

B.
Use the aspnet_regiis tool to encrypt the connection string that is used to connect to the SQL Server 2008 database.

C.
Create a strongly typed custom Profile class. In the Profile class, encrypt the provided information before storing it in the database.

D.
Create a custom profile provider. In the custom provider, ensure that the provided information is encrypted before storing it in the database.

Answer: D

Practicetest 70-567 Microsoft it-exams

650-756

650-756 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 650-756 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 650-756 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 650-756 Exam it-exams.com 650-756 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 650-756 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 650-756 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 650-756 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 650-756 preparation materials, through the 650-756 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 650-756 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 650-756 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 650-756 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-536 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-536 Microsoft it-exams

70-536 TS:MS.NET Framework 2.0-Application Develop Foundation our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-536 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You need to use the performance counters to ensure that the performance metrics are updated as required.

Which code segment should you use as the body of the LogOrderFinished function in the ApplicationServices.vb file? (Each correct answer presents a complete solution. Choose two.)

A. totalCounter. Increment ()
averageCounter.IncrementBy(DateTime.Now.Ticks - order.OrderDate.Ticks)
averageCounterBase.Increment()
B. totalCounter.IncrementBy(totalCounter-RawValue)
averageCounter.Increment()
averageCounterBase.IncrementBy(TimeSpan.TicksPerSecond)
C. totalCounter.RawValue += 1
averageCounter.Increment()
averageCounterBase . IncrementBy (order .Order Date. Ticks - DateTime. Now. Ticks)
D. totalCounter. RawValue += 1
averageCounter.IncrementBy(DateTime.Now.ToBinary() - order.OrderDate.ToBinary())
averageCounterBase.Increment()
E. totalCounter. Increment ()
averageCounter.Increment()
averageCounterBase.IncrementBy(DateTime.Now.Ticks)
F. totalCounter.IncrementBy(totalCounter.RawValue)
averageCounter.IncrementBy(TimeSpan.TicksPerSecond)
averageCounterBase.Increment()

Answer: CE



QUESTION 2
Your application uses two threads, named threadOne and threadTwo. You need to modify the code to prevent the execution of threadOne until threadTwo completes execution. What should you do?

A. Call the Sleep method of threadOne.
B. Use a WaitCallback delegate to synchronize the threads.
C. Configure threadTwo to run at a higher priority.
D. Call the SpinLock method of threadOne.
E. Configure threadOne to run at a lower priority.

Answer: B


QUESTION 3
You are testing a newly developed method named PersistToDB. This method accepts a parameter of type EventLogEntry. This method does not return a value.

You need to create a code segment that helps you to test the method. The code segment must read entries from the application log of local computers and then pass the entries on to the PersistToDB method. The code block must pass only events of type Error or Warning from the source MySource to the PersistToDB method.

Which code segment should you use?

A. EventLog= myLog = gcnew EventLog("Application", "."); for each (EventLogEntry
= entry in myLog->Entries) {
if (entry->Source == "MySource") {
PersistToDB(entry);
}
}
225
B. EventLog= myLog = gcnew EventLog("Application", "."); for each (EventLogEntry
= entry in myLog->Entries) {
if (entry->Source == "MySource") {
if (entry->EntryType == EventLogEntryType::Error ||
entry->EntryType == EventLogEntryType::Warning) {
PersistToDB(entry);
}
}
}
C. EventLog= myLog = gcnew EventLog("Application", "."); myLog->Source = "MySource";
for each (EventLogEntry= entry in myLog->Entries) {
if (entry->EntryType == (EventLogEntryType::Error &
EventLogEntryType::Warning)) {
PersistToDB(entry);
}
}
D. EventLog= myLog = gcnew EventLog("Application", "."); myLog->Source = "MySource";
for each (EventLogEntry= entry in myLog->Entries) {
if (entry->EntryType == EventLogEntryType::Error ||
entry->EntryType == EventLogEntryType::Warning) {
PersistToDB(entry);
}
}

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-536 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-557 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-557 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-557 TS:Microsoft Forefront Client and Server,Configuring our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-557 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You need to configure Forefront Security for Exchange Server (FSE) to scan the bodies and attachments of all e-mail messages when you run a Manual Scan Job. What should you do?

A. Select the Enable Store Scanning option.
B. Select the Enable Transport Scanning option.
C. Enable the Body Scanning C Manual option.
D. Enable the Body Scanning C Realtime option.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
You deploy Forefront Client Security to all client computers. You configure a Microsoft Operations Manager (MOM) 2005 operator group named FCS Admins. FCS Admins contains
e-mail-enabled user accounts. You notice that the FCS Admins operator group is not notified when Client Security alerts are generated in the MOM 2005 Administrator Console. You verify that MOM 2005 is configured with a valid SMTP server and that FCS Admins contains the appropriate user accounts. You need to ensure that FCS Admins receives Client Security alerts by e-mail. What should you do next?

A. In the MOM 2005 Administrator Console, add FCS Admins to Custom Fields 1 on the Custom Alerts Field
tab.
B. In the MOM 2005 Administrator Console, add the FCS Admins operator group to the Client Security
notification group.
C. On the Client Security server, add the FCS Admins operator group to the local MOM 2005 Administrators
group.
D. In the Client Security policy, change the reporting alert level to 5.

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
You deploy Forefront Client Security to all client computers. You need to verify that all client computers have up-to-date antivirus definitions. What should you review?

A. Deployment Summary report
B. fcsam.log file
C. Malware Summary report
D. Security event log

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-557 Microsoft it-exams

9A0-094

9A0-094 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 9A0-094 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 9A0-094 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 9A0-094 Exam it-exams.com 9A0-094 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 9A0-094 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 9A0-094 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 9A0-094 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 9A0-094 preparation materials, through the 9A0-094 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 9A0-094 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 9A0-094 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 9A0-094 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-516 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-516 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-516 TS: Accessing Data with Microsoft .NET Framework 4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-516 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You use Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 to develop an application that uses the Entity Framework.
The application defines the following Entity SQL (ESQL) query, which must be executed against the mode.

string prodQuery = “select value p from Products as p where p.ProductCategory.Name = @p0″;

You need to execute the query. Which code segment should you use?

A. var prods = ctx.CreateQuery(prodQuery,
new ObjectParameter("p0″, "Road Bikes")).ToList();
B. var prods = ctx.ExecuteStoreCommand(prodQuery,
new ObjectParameter("p0″, "Road Bikes")).ToList();
C. var prods = ctx.ExecuteFunction(prodQuery,
new ObjectParameter("p0″, "Road Bikes")).ToList();
D. var prods = ctx.ExecuteStoreQuery(prodQuery,
new ObjectParameter("p0″, "Road Bikes")).ToList();

Answer: A

Explanation/Reference:
CreateQuery - Creates an ObjectQuery in the current object context by using the specified query string.
ExecuteStoreCommand - Executes an arbitrary command directly against the data source using the existing connection.
ExecuteFunction(String, ObjectParameter[]) - Executes a stored procedure or function that is defined in the data source and
expressed in the conceptual model; discards any results returned from the function; and returns the number of rows affected by the execution.
ExecuteStoreQuery(String, Object[]) - Executes a query directly against the data source that returns a sequence of typed results.

ObjectContext.CreateQuery Method
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb339670.aspx)


QUESTION 2
You use Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 to develop an application that connects to a Microsoft SQL Server 2008 database.
The application uses nested transaction scopes. An inner transaction scope contains code that inserts records into the database.
You need to ensure that the inner transaction can successfully commit even if the outer transaction rolls back.

What are two possible TransactionScope constructors that you can use for the inner transaction to achieve this goal?
(Each correct answer presents a complete solution. Choose two.)

A. TransactionScope(TransactionScopeOption.Required)
B. TransactionScope()
C. TransactionScope(TransactionScopeOption.RequiresNew)
D. TransactionScope(TransactionScopeOption.Suppress)

Answer: CD

Explanation/Reference:
Required - A transaction is required by the scope. It uses an ambient transaction if one already exists.
Otherwise, it creates a new transaction before entering the scope. This is the default value.
RequiresNew - A new transaction is always created for the scope.
Suppress - The ambient transaction context is suppressed when creating the scope.
All operations within the scope are done without an ambient transaction context.

TransactionScopeOption Numeration
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.transactions.transactionscopeoption.aspx)


QUESTION 3
You use Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 and Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 to develop an application that uses the Entity Framework.
Entity types in the model are generated by the Entity Data Model generator tool (EdmGen.exe).
You write the following code. (Line numbers are included for reference only.)

01 MemoryStream stream = new MemoryStream();
02 var query = context.Contacts.Include(“SalesOrderHeaders.SalesOrderDetails”);
03 var contact = query.Where(“it.LastName = @lastname”, new ObjectParameter(“lastname”, lastName)).First();
04 ....

You need to serialize the contact and all of its related objects to the MemoryStream so that the contact can be deserialized back into the model.
Which code segment should you insert at line 04?

A. var formatter = new XmlSerializer(typeof(Contact), new Type[]
{

typeof(SalesOrderHeader),

typeof(SalesOrderDetail)
});
formatter.Serialize(stream, contact);

B. var formatter = new XmlSerializer(typeof(Contact));
formatter.Serialize(stream, contact);

C. var formatter = new BinaryFormatter();
formatter.Serialize(stream, contact);

D. var formatter = new SoapFormatter();
formatter.Serialize(stream, contact);


Answer: A

Practicetest 70-516 Microsoft it-exams

650-752

650-752 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 650-752 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 650-752 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 650-752 Exam it-exams.com 650-752 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 650-752 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 650-752 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 650-752 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 650-752 preparation materials, through the 650-752 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 650-752 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 650-752 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 650-752 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-518 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-518 Microsoft it-exams

70-518 PRO: Design & Develop Wndws Apps Using MS .NET Frmwrk 4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-518 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are developing a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application.
You need to recommend a testing strategy that will identify the following for the application:
Bottlenecks and their causes
Baseline for future regression testing
Response time
CPU utilization
Behavior under various workload patterns
Which testing strategy should you recommend?

A. Load testing
B. Stress testing
C. Capacity testing
D. Performance testing

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
You are desiging a complex, critical Windows desktop application.
You plan to implement a logging strategy for the application.
You need to record all unexpected errors that occur in the application.
What should you do?

A. Subscribe to the unhandled exception event handler for the AppDomain object
Record relevant application-specific information to an external log
B. Subscribe to the unhandled exception event handler for the applications dispatcher on the main
application thread
C. Record relevant application-specific information to an external log.
Create a generic catch (Exception e) block in the Main method of the application
D. Record relevant application-specific information to a log in the Main method.
Create a global win 32 unhandled exception filter.

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
You are developing a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application.
You plan to create 2 application domains named AppDom1 and AppDom2.
AppDom1 will be hosted by a Shell host.
AppDom2 will be hosted by a custom-designed host.
AppDom2 will access unmanaged API's.
AppDom2 contains user-defined custom exceptions.
You need to ensure that exceptions thrown in AppDom2 can be handled by AppDom1
What should you do?

A. Add a DispatcherUnhandledException event handler to AppDom1
B. Add the assembly that defines the user-defined custom exception class to the application base for
AppDom1
C. Derive the user-defined custom exception class from the System Application Exception class
D. Use a strong name for the assembly to contain the user-defined custom exception class

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-518 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-519 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-519 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-519 Designing & Developing Web Apps Using MS .NET Frmwk 4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-519 Microsoft it-exams

1.You have an ASP NET Web application.
The Web application displays frequently changing data as application usage increases more quenes are issued and the database response time increases.
You need to design a strategy for improving database query response time.
Which approach should you recommend?

A. Use the application cache
B. Use SQL Server replication
C. Use network load balancing
D. Use multiple active result sets

Answer:B


2.You are designing an ASP NET Web Forms application
The application supports thousands ofconcurrent users.
A Web form in the application enables users to send personalized e-mail messages to thousands of recipients.
You need to design the application to optimize performance.
Which approach should you recommend?

A. Use a separate process from the OnClick method of the form.
B. Use a BackgroundWorker class from the OnClick method of the form
C. Use the classes in the System.Web.Mail namespace from the OnClick method of the form
D. Use the classes in the System.Net.MaiI namespace from the OnClick method of the form

Answer:A


3.You have a Web application that has been migrated from ASP.NET 3.5 to ASP.NET 4. While testing the migrated Web application, developers notice that the non-input Web controls with the property Enabled="false" are rendenng as enabled.
You need to ensure that the controls in the migrated Web application render correctly, and that other Web applications hosted on the same Web server are not affected by the solution.
Which approach should you recommend

A. Use the controls element of the pages section of the machine'' config file
B. Use the controls element of the pages section of the migrated application's web config file
C. Use the control Rendering Compatibility Version element of the pages section of the machine config file
D. Use the control Rendenng Compatibility Version element of the pages section of the migrated application's web config file

Answer:D

Practicetest 70-519 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-515 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-515 Microsoft it-exams

70-515 TS: Web Applications Development with Microsoft.NET Framework 4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-515 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are developing an ASP.NET Web page. You add a data-bound GridView control. The GridView contains a TemplateField that includes a DropDownList. You set the GridViews ClientIDMode property to Static, and you set the ClientIDRowSuffix property to ProductID. You need to be able to reference individual DropDownList controls from client-side script by using the ProductID. What should you set the ClientIDMode property of the DropDownList to?

A. AutoID
B. Static
C. Inherit
D. Predictable

Answer: D
Section: linq, data controls, dynamic data



QUESTION 2
Gridview: How to change the image of an image control place in each row in a gridview:

A. ItemDataBound
B. Init
C. Prerender
D.

Answer: A
Section: linq, data controls, dynamic data



QUESTION 3
You are developing an ASP.NET Web page. The page includes a List instance. You add a FormView control to display a single Product from this list. You need to bind the list to the FormView control. Which FormView property should you set in the code-behind file?

A. DataSource
B. DataSourceID
C. DataKeyNames
D. DataMember

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-515 Microsoft it-exams

HH0-110

HH0-110 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com HH0-110 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification HH0-110 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass HH0-110 Exam it-exams.com HH0-110 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the HH0-110 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your HH0-110 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions HH0-110 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online HH0-110 preparation materials, through the HH0-110 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com HH0-110 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With HH0-110 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com HH0-110 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

310-065

310-065 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 310-065 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 310-065 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 310-065 Exam it-exams.com 310-065 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 310-065 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 310-065 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 310-065 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 310-065 preparation materials, through the 310-065 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 310-065 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 310-065 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 310-065 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-511-Csharp Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-511-Csharp Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-511-Csharp MCTS: Windows Applications Development with Microsoft .NET Framework 4 Practice Test our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-511-Csharp Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You use Microsoft .NET Framework 4 to create a Windows Forms application.
You have a DataGridView that is bound to a DataTable containing a column named ProductName.
The ProductName column can contain any valid string, except "ProductX," "ProductY," "ProductZ."
You need to ensure that only valid entries for ProductName are saved when users edit the DataGridView.
Which DataGridView event should you use?
A. CellBeginEdit
B. Invalidated
C. Validated
D. Validating

Answer: D


QUESTION 2
You use Microsoft .NET Framework 4 to create a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application.
The application contains three text boxes named txtAddress, txtCity, and txtState.
You need to ensure that the postal code is automatically set based on the information typed by users in the text boxes.
You also need to ensure that the complete address is displayed in a TextBlock control.
Which code fragment should you use?
A.














B.








C.








D.















Answer: C


QUESTION 3
You use Microsoft .NET Framework 4 to create a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application.
The application contains an ObservableCollection object named Pictures that contains several Picture objects.
Each Picture object contains the Name and PictureFilePath properties.
You add a ListBox control to the application.
You need to ensure that the pictures are displayed in the ListBox control.
Which code fragment should you use?
A.








B.






C.









D.







Answer: D

Practicetest 70-511-Csharp Microsoft it-exams

70-403

70-403 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 70-403 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 70-403 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 70-403 Exam it-exams.com 70-403 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 70-403 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 70-403 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 70-403 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 70-403 preparation materials, through the 70-403 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 70-403 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 70-403 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 70-403 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-502 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-502 Microsoft it-exams

70-502 TS: Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 – Windows Presentation Foundation our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-502 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You create an assembly by using Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5.
The assembly creates a new text file in the root of the C: drive. The assembly will be used in a Windows Presentation Foundation standalone application. The assembly will also be used in a Windows Presentation Foundation XAML Browser Application (XBAP).
The assembly contains the following code segment.
(Line numbers are included for reference only.)

01 public void Save()
02 {
03
04 FileStream stream = File.Create("c:\newfile.txt");
05 try
06 {
07 StreamWriter writer = new StreamWriter(stream);
08 try
09 {
10 writer.WriteLine("Bew line in text file");
11 }
12 finally
13 {
14 writer.Dispose();
15 }
16 }
17 finally
18 {
19 stream.Dispose();
20 }
21
22 }

You need to ensure that the assembly functions without propagating errors in both standalone and XBAP applications.
What should you do?

A. Configure the assembly to use the Nothing Permission set.
B. Configure the assembly to use the Partial Trust Permission set.
C. Demand the FileIOPermissionAccess.Write permission in line 03 and add an exception handler at line 21.
D. Demand the FileIOPermissionAccess.Append permission in line 03 and add an exception handler at line 21.

Answer: C


QUESTION 2
Your company has deployed a Windows Presentation Foundation application on client computers by using the ClickOnce technology.
The application interrupts the users in their tasks by prompting them to look for updates. You need to ensure that the application automatically detects updates without blocking the users interaction with the application.
What should you do?

A. Call the ApplicationDeployment.CheckForUpdate() function from the startup routine of the application.
B. Add an expiration element to the deployment manifest file. Set the maximumAge attribute to 24 and the unit attribute to hour.
C. Add the beforeApplicationStartup element to the deployment manifest file.
Configure a schedule job to launch another instance of the application in the background once a day.
D. Add a System.Windows.Threading.DispatcherTimer object and the ApplicationDeployment.CheckForUpdateAsync() function to the code-behind file.
Set the Interval property of the System.Windows.Threading.DispatcherTimer object to 1 day.

Answer: D


QUESTION 3
You create a Windows Presentation Foundation application by using Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5.
You perform the following two tasks:
Use a digital certificate that is generated by an internal certificate authority (CA) to sign the application.
Store the application files on a central Web site.
You instruct the users to access the Web site and start the application by using the ClickOnce technology. The users report that their attempts to start the application fail.
You need to ensure that the users can use the application.
What should you do?

A. Deploy the digital certificate on the Trusted Publisher store of the Web server.
B. Deploy the digital certificate on the Trusted Publisher store of each client computer.
C. Redeploy the application by using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Publish Wizard.
D. Recompile the application by using a key file that is generated by the sn.exe file.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-502 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-506 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-506 Microsoft it-exams

70-506 Microsoft Silverlight 4,Development our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-506 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are developing a Silverlight 4 application. You configure the application to use GPU acceleration. The application is hosted on a Web page by using the following HTML markup.
(Line numbers are included for reference only.)

01
02
03
04
05


You need to identify the surfaces that are GPUaccelerated in the application. Which line of code should you insert at line 04?

A.


B.


C.


D.



Answer: D






QUESTION 2
You are developing a Silverlight 4 application named Contoso.Accounts.Ui. The application uses a Silverlight library named Contoso.Ui.Common. You use application library caching to reduce the size of the XAP file by deploying Contoso.Ui.Common as a separate zip file. You create the following XML file.




Contoso.UI.Common
1.0.0.0
5ca45a28299b8a35
Contoso.UI.Common.dll




You need to ensure that the Contoso.Ui.Common library will be packaged as a separate zip file.
What should you do?

A.
Save the XML file as Contoso.Ui.Common.extmap.xml to the Bin folder of the Contoso.Accounts.Ui project.

B.
Save the XML file as Contoso.Accounts.Ui.extmap.xml to the Bin folder of the Contoso.Accounts.Ui project.

C.
Save the XML file as Contoso.Ui.Common.extmap.xml to the Contoso.Ui.Common project. Set the Build Action for the file as Embedded Resource.

D.
Save the XML file as Contoso.Accounts.Ui.extmap.xml to the Contoso.Ui.Common project. Set the Build Action for the file as Embedded Resource.


Answer: A






QUESTION 3
You are developing a Silverlight 4 application that will be hosted on a page at http://www.contoso.com/MainPage.aspx. You also create a Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) service hosted at http://www.fabrikam.com/BusinessService.svc. You need to ensure that the Silverlight application can access the WCF service. You also need to ensure that no other Silverlight applications can access the WCF service.
What should you do?

A.
Publish a clientaccesspolicy.xml file at the root folder of http://www.fabrikam.com by using the following XAML fragment.
< xml version="1.0" encoding="utf8" >













B.
Publish a clientaccesspolicy.xml file at the root folder of http: //www.fabrikam.com by using the following XAML fragment.
< xml version="1.0" encoding="utf8" >













C.
Publish a clientaccesspolicy.xml file at the root folder of http://www.contoso.com by using the following XAML fragment.
< xml version="1.0" encoding="utf8" >













D.
Publish a clientaccesspolicy.xml file at the root folder of http://www.contoso.com by using the following XAML fragment.
< xml version="1.0" encoding="utf8" >














Answer: B

Practicetest 70-506 Microsoft it-exams

000-025

M70-201 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com M70-201 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification M70-201 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass M70-201 Exam it-exams.com M70-201 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the M70-201 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your M70-201 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions M70-201 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online M70-201 preparation materials, through the M70-201 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com M70-201 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With M70-201 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com M70-201 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

000-025
000-025 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 000-025 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 000-025 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 000-025 Exam it-exams.com 000-025 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 000-025 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 000-025 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 000-025 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 000-025 preparation materials, through the 000-025 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 000-025 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 000-025 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 000-025 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-511 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-511 Microsoft it-exams

70-511 TS: Windows Applications Development with Microsoft.NET Framework 4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-511 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
AB-VB
You are developing a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application. This application will be deployed to 20 countries. However, it will only be localized to some of those countries' regional dialects.
The localization will be performed by using resource files. However, no culture will be specified in the project file with the UlCulture tags.
You must ensure that the application defaults to English for those regions that are not localized.
What should you do?

A. Add the following code segment to the Assemblylnfo file.

B. Add the following code segment to the Assemblylnfo file.

C. Add the following code segment to the Application constructor.
Thread.CurrentThread.CurrentCulture
New CultureInfo ("en-US")
D. Add the following code segment to the Application constructor.
Thread.CurrentThread.CurrentUICulture =
New CultureInfo("en-US")

Answer: A


QUESTION 2
AB-VB
You are developing a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application page.
The page uses extensive graphics controls and animation that require absolute positioning.
You need to select a control to use as a container.
Which control should you select?

A. Canvas
B. DockPanel
C. StackPanel
D. Grid

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
AB-VB
You are creating a Windows Presentation Foundation (WPF) application.
A control periodically appears to alert the user of status changes within the application.
You need to specify that each time the control appears, it fades out within half a second.
Which markup segment should you add to the Storyboard element of the control?

A.
B.
C.
D.

Answer: A

Practicetest 70-511 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-463 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-463 Microsoft it-exams

70-463 Implementing a Data Warehouse with Microsoft SQL Server 2012 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-463 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION: 1
You are designing a data warehouse for a fresh food distribution business that stores sates by individual product. It stores sales targets by product category. Products are classified into subcategories and categories. Each product is included in only a single product subcategory, and each subcategory is included in only a single category. The data
warehouse will be a data source for an Analysis Services cube. The data warehouse
contains two fact tables:
- factSales, used to record daily sales by product
- factProductTarget, used to record the monthly sales targets by product category Reports
must be developed against the warehouse that reports product sales by product, category
and subcategory, and product sales targets. You need to design the product dimension.
The solution should use as few tables as possible while supporting all the requirements.
What should you do?

A. Create two product tables, dimProduct and dimProductCategory. Connect
factSales to dimProduct and factProductTarget to dimProductCategory with foreign key
constraints. Direct the cube developer to use key granularity attributes.
B. Create one product table, dimProduct, which contains product detail, category, and
subcategory columns. Connect factSales to dimProduct with a foreign key constraint.
Direct the cube developer to use a non-key granularity attribute for factProductTarget.
C. Create three product tables, dimProduct, dimProductCategory, and dimProductSubcategory, and a fourth bridge table that joins products to their appropriate
category and subcategory table records with foreign key constraints. Direct the cube
developer to use key granularity attributes.
D. Create three product tables, dimProduct, dimProductCategory, and
dimProductSubcategory. Connect factSales to all three product tables and connect
factProductTarget to dimProductCategory with foreign key constraints. Direct the cube developer to use key granularity attributes.

Answer: B


QUESTION: 2
You are reviewing the design of a student dimension table in an existing data warehouse
hosted on SQL Azure. The current dimension design does not allow the retention of
historical changes to student attributes such as ParentOccupation. You need to redesign
the dimension to enable the full historical reporting of changes to multiple student
attributes including ParentOccupation. What should you do?

A. Add CurrentValue and PreviousValue columns to the student dimension.
B. Enable Snapshot Isolation on the data warehouse.
C. Add an IsCurrent column to the student dimension.
D. Add StartDate and EndDate columns to the student dimension.

Answer: C

Practicetest 70-463 Microsoft it-exams

1K0-002

1K0-002 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 1K0-002 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 1K0-002 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 1K0-002 Exam it-exams.com 1K0-002 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 1K0-002 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 1K0-002 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 1K0-002 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 1K0-002 preparation materials, through the 1K0-002 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 1K0-002 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 1K0-002 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 1K0-002 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

1K0-001

1K0-001 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 1K0-001 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 1K0-001 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 1K0-001 Exam it-exams.com 1K0-001 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 1K0-001 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 1K0-001 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 1K0-001 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 1K0-001 preparation materials, through the 1K0-001 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 1K0-001 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 1K0-001 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 1K0-001 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

M70-101

M70-101 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com M70-101 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification M70-101 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass M70-101 Exam it-exams.com M70-101 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the M70-101 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your M70-101 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions M70-101 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online M70-101 preparation materials, through the M70-101 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com M70-101 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With M70-101 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com M70-101 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

HP3-C15

HP3-C15 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com HP3-C15 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification HP3-C15 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass HP3-C15 Exam it-exams.com HP3-C15 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the HP3-C15 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your HP3-C15 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions HP3-C15 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online HP3-C15 preparation materials, through the HP3-C15 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com HP3-C15 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With HP3-C15 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com HP3-C15 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

COG-625

COG-625 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com COG-625 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification COG-625 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass COG-625 Exam it-exams.com COG-625 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the COG-625 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your COG-625 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions COG-625 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online COG-625 preparation materials, through the COG-625 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com COG-625 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With COG-625 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com COG-625 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-462 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-462 Microsoft it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

70-462 Administering Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Databases our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 70-462 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION: 1
You create an availability group that has replicas named HA/Server01 and
HA/Server02. Currently, HA/Server01 is the primary replica. You have multiple
queries that read data and produce reports from the database. You need to offload the
reporting workload to the secondary replica when HA/Server01 is the primary replica.
What should you do?

A. Set the Availability Mode property of HA/Server02 to Asynchronous commit.
B. Set the Readable Secondary property of HA/Server02 to Read-intent only.
C. Set the Connections in Primary Role property of HA/Server01 to Allow read/write
connections.
D. Set the Availability Mode property of HA/Server01 to Asynchronous commit.

Answer: C


QUESTION: 2
You administer two Microsoft SQL Server 2012 servers. Each server resides in a
different, untrusted domain. You plan to configure database mirroring. You need to be
able to create database mirroring endpoints on both servers. What should you do?

A. Configure the SQL Server service account to use Network Service.
B. Use a server certificate.
C. Use a database certificate.
D. Configure the SQL Server service account to use Local System.

Answer: B


QUESTION: 3
You administer a Microsoft SQL Server 2012 instance that has several SQL Server
Agent jobs configured. When SQL Server Agent jobs fail, the error messages returned
by the job steps do not provide the required detail. The following error message is an
example error message:
"The job failed. The Job was invoked by User CONTOSO\ServiceAccount. The last
step to run was step 1 (Subplan_1)."
You need to ensure that all available details of the job step failures for SQL Server
Agent jobs are retained.
What should you do?

A. Configure output files.
B. Expand agent logging to include information from all events.
C. Disable the Limit size of job history log feature.
D. Configure event forwarding.
Answer: A

Practicetest 70-462 Microsoft it-exams

000-M87

000-M87 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 000-M87 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 000-M87 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 000-M87 Exam it-exams.com 000-M87 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 000-M87 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 000-M87 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 000-M87 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 000-M87 preparation materials, through the 000-M87 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 000-M87 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 000-M87 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 000-M87 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

ZF-100-500

ZF-100-500 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com ZF-100-500 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification ZF-100-500 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass ZF-100-500 Exam it-exams.com ZF-100-500 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the ZF-100-500 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your ZF-100-500 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions ZF-100-500 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online ZF-100-500 preparation materials, through the ZF-100-500 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com ZF-100-500 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With ZF-100-500 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com ZF-100-500 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

A00-250

A00-250 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com A00-250 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification A00-250 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass A00-250 Exam it-exams.com A00-250 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the A00-250 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your A00-250 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions A00-250 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online A00-250 preparation materials, through the A00-250 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com A00-250 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With A00-250 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com A00-250 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

642-887

642-887 exam is one of popular IT Certifications. Many candidates won not have confidence to get it if just go over these excessive knowlege. Actually, it-exams.com 642-887 braindumps are the fastest and smartest way to pass your exam and obtain your IT Certification 642-887 certification.

100% Guarantee to Pass 642-887 Exam it-exams.com 642-887 braindumps can ensure you a passing score in the test. However, if you fail the 642-887 exam at the first attempt after using our products, we will arrange a full refund to you. You just need to send your 642-887 score report and some relevant forms to us. After confirming your information, we give your money back as soon possible to eliminate your worries.

A real and comprehensive solutions 642-887 trainging in it-exams.com. With our exclusive online 642-887 preparation materials, through the 642-887 exam easily. it-exams.com guarantee 100% success rate.it-exams.com is a certified professional recognized leader in the preparation, it provides the most comprehensive certification standard industry training options to pursue.

it-exams.com 642-887 Questions and Answers are the most thorough, accurate, and up-to-date practice test you will find on the market today. With 642-887 Questions and Answers, it-exams.com 642-887 gives you the confidence in knowing that you will pass this difficult exam on the first try.

Practicetest 70-461 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-461 Microsoft it-exams

70-461 Querying Microsoft SQL Server 2012 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-461 Microsoft it-exams

1.You use Microsoft SQL Server 2012 to develop a database application. You create a stored procedure named dbo.ModifyData that can modify rows. You need to ensure that when the transaction fails, dbo.ModifyData meets the following requirements:
Does not return an error
Closes all opened transactions
Which Transact-SQL statement should you use?

A. BEGIN TRANSACTION
BEGIN TRY
EXEC dbo.ModifyData
COMMIT TRANSACTION
END TRY
BEGIN CATCH
IF @@ TRANCOUNT = 0
ROLLBACK TRANSACTION;
END CATCH
B. BEGIN TRANSACTION
BEGIN TRY
EXEC dbo.ModifyData
COMMIT TRANSACTION
END TRY
BEGIN CATCH
IF @@ERROR != 0
ROLLBACK TRANSACTION;
THROW;
END CATCH
C. BEGIN TRANSACTION
BEGIN TRY
EXEC dbo.ModifyData
COMMIT TRANSACTION
END TRY
BEGIN CATCH
IF @@TRANCOUNT = 0
ROLLBACK TRANSACTION;
THROW;
END CATCH
D. BEGIN TRANSACTION
BEGIN TRY
EXEC dbo.ModifyData
COMMIT TRANSACTION
END TRY
BEGIN CATCH
IF @@ERROR != 0
ROLLBACK TRANSACTION;
END CATCH

Answer: D


2.You are developing a database application by using Microsoft SQL Server 2012. An application that uses a database begins to run slowly. You discover that during reads, the transaction experiences blocking from concurrent updates. You need to ensure that throughout the transaction the data maintains the original version. What should you do?

A. Add a HASH hint to the query.
B. Add a LOOP hint to the query.
C. Add a FORCESEEK hint to the query.
D. Add an INCLUDE clause to the index.
E. Add a FORCESCAN hint to the Attach query.
F. Add a columnstore index to cover the query.
G. Enable the optimize for ad hoc workloads option.
H. Cover the unique clustered index with a columnstore index.
I. Include a SET FORCEPLAN ON statement before you run the query.
J. Include a SET STATISTICS PROFILE ON statement before you run the query.
K. Include a SET STATISTICS SHOWPLAN_XML ON statement before you run the query.
L. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL REPEATABLE READ statement before you run the query.
M. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL SNAPSHOT statement before you run the query.
N. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL SERIALIZABLE statement before you run the query.

Answer: M


3.You are developing a database application by using Microsoft SQL Server 2012. You have a query that runs slower than expected. You need to capture execution plans that will include detailed information on missing indexes recommended by the query optimizer. What should you do?

A. Add a HASH hint to the query.
B. Add a LOOP hint to the query.
C. Add a FORCESEEK hint to the query.
D. Add an INCLUDE clause to the index.
E. Add a FORCESCAN hint to the Attach query.
F. Add a columnstore index to cover the query.
G. Enable the optimize for ad hoc workloads option.
H. Cover the unique clustered index with a columnstore index.
I. Include a SET FORCEPLAN ON statement before you run the query.
J. Include a SET STATISTICS PROFILE ON statement before you run the query.
K. Include a SET STATISTICS SHOWPLAN_XML ON statement before you run the query.
L. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL REPEATABLE READ statement before you run the query.
M. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL SNAPSHOT statement before you run the query.
N. Include a SET TRANSACTION ISOLATION LEVEL SERIALIZABLE statement before you run the query.

Answer: K

Practicetest 70-461 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-453 Microsoft it-exams

Practicetest 70-453 Microsoft it-exams

70-453 Upgrade: Transition Your MCITP SQL Server 2005 DBA to MCITP SQL Server 2008 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 70-453 Microsoft it-exams

QUESTION 1
You are the administrator of your company network. You are in charge of three SQL Server 2008 instances named Instance1, Instance2, and Instance3. Each of them runs on a separate server.
Between Instance1 and Instance2, a mission-critical database is mirrored. At present Instance1 currently acts as the Principal, while Instance3 acts as the witness. You intend to apply a patch on both servers. The server needs to restart itself. You have to identify the sequence of steps necessary to ensure that the patching process is completed with the minimum time and the database is online on the partner that currently does not apply the patch. Besides this two, you have to ensure that the database does not failover to the other partner during this time.So what should you do?

A. You should apply the patch to the server which runs Instance2. Apply the patch to the server which
runs Instance1.
B. You should apply the patch to the server that runs Instance2. Manually failover the mirroring
session. Apply the patch to the server that runs Instance1.
C. You should remove the mirroring session. Apply the patch to the server that runs Instance2.
Apply the patch to the server that runs Instance1. Re-establish the mirror
D. You should suspend the mirroring session. Apply the patch to the server that runs Instance2.
Resume the mirroring session. Manually failover the mirroring. Apply the patch to the server that
runs Instance1.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
You are the administrator of your company network. You are in charge of a SQL Server 2008 instance.
You have to make sure that the names of all user-defined stored procedures contain the prefix usp_ on all instances. Besides this, you have to make sure that you cannot create stored procedures that do not contain this prefix. So what should you do?

A. You should create a policy that targets the name of the stored procedure that is evaluated
on demand.
B. You should create a policy that targets the name of the stored procedure that is evaluated
on change.
C. You should create a condition that targets the name of stored procedure that is evaluated
on demand.
D. You should create a condition that targets the name of the stored procedure that is evaluated
on change.

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
You are the administrator of your company network. You are in charge of a SQL Server 2008 instance that contains a database named DBx1. DBX1 contains a stored procedure called ProcedureX1 and a table named TableX1. By using a sp_executesql Transact-SQL statement, ProcedureX1 selects data from TableX1. As you know, there's a rule in your company, which is users are not permitted to access tables directly in any database.When ProcedureX1 is run by users, the following exception pops up: "Msg 229, Level 14, State 5, Line 1The SELECT permission was denied on the object 'Table1', database 'DB1', schema 'dbo'." Now you must enable the user to execute ProcedureX1 successfully, while you have to make sure that it will not break the rule of the company. So what should you do to achieve this?

A. You should execute the GRANT SELECT ON dbo.TableX1 TO User1 Transact-SQL statement.
B. You should alter ProcedureX1 and add the WITH EXECUTE AS OWNER option to its header.
C. You should execute the GRANT EXECUTE ON dbo.Procedure1 TO User1 Transact-SQL statement.
D. You should alter ProcedureX1 and add the EXECUTE AS USER = 'dbo' option immediately before
the call to the sp_executesql stored procedure.

Answer: B

Practicetest 70-453 Microsoft it-exams

Sonntag, 23. Dezember 2012

I waiting for a surprise..

it is a good day, and today is also a sunny day. I waiting for a surprise.))))

What should I do for my garden?

What should I do for my garden? Can anyone give me some suggestiong?

Christmas Day is coming.

Christmas Day is coming. Happy!!!

Practicetest 9L0-623 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-623 Apple it-exams

9L0-623 Mac OS X Deployment 10.6 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-623 Apple it-exams

QUESTION 1
How does a sparse bundle disk image differ from a sparse disk image?

A. The image data in a sparse bundle disk image cannot be encrypted, while the image
data in a sparse disk image can be encrypted.
B. The image data in a sparse bundle disk image is stored in multiple files, while the
image data in a sparse disk image is stored in a single file.
C. A sparse bundle disk image must be formatted as an HFS volume, while a sparse disk
image may use any format available for a Mac OS X volume.
D. As more files are added to a sparse bundle disk image, its file size increases, unlike a
sparse disk image, whose file size remains static as files are added.

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
What information is stored in the ~/Library/Preferences/ByHost/ folder on a Mac OS X v10.6 computer?

A. The computer's network settings
B. The user preferences that are tied to specific computers
C. The access control settings specifying who can access the computer
D. The access control lists specifying the local files to which network users have Read/Write access

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
In Mac OS X v10.6, which utility can you use by itself to create images for NetBoot service?

A. hdiutil
B. Disk Utility
C. System Image Utility
D. NetBoot Imaging Utility

Answer: C

Practicetest 9L0-623 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-624 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-624 Apple it-exams

9L0-624 Mac OS X Directory Services 10.6 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-624 Apple it-exams

QUESTION 1
You have started up a Mac OS X Server v10.6 computer in single-user mode. In this mode, which command-line tool should you use to edit a user in the /Local/Default directory domain?

A. vi
B. vipw
C. plutil
D. slapadd

Answer: A



QUESTION 2
You are configuring a Mac OS X Server v10.6 computer to search multiple directory domains. How can you specify the order in which the server searches the directories when authenticating users?

A. Define a custom search path in the Authentication pane of Directory Utility.
B. Run slapconfig -setauthmechanisms and specify the directory domain search order.
C. In the Mappings pane of Directory Utility, modify the mapping for the
AuthenticationAuthority attribute.
D. In the Advanced pane of Workgroup Manager, configure the computer account and
enter the authentication search path.

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
In Mac OS X v10.6, how do you enable or disable debug logging for the DirectoryService process?

A. Enter the command killall -USR1 DirectoryService in Terminal.
B. In Server Admin, select Detailed Logging in the Open Directory service pane.
C. Enter the command defaults write com.apple.DirectoryService LogLevel debug in Terminal.
D. Enter the command serveradmin settings dirserv:loggingAttributes:logLevel = "debug"
in Terminal.

Answer: A


Practicetest 9L0-624 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-625 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-625 Apple it-exams

9L0-625 Mac OS X Security and Mobility 10.6 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-625 Apple it-exams

QUESTION 1
Which DNS record must reside in a Mac OS X Server v10.6 zone file in order for you to perform a valid forward lookup for a domain name that is def ined in a primary zone?

A. A
B. PTR
C. SRV
D. CNAME

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
Which statement presents a valid reason for developing web apps for the iPhone rather than native iPhone apps?

A. Web apps can use the full suite of iPhone APIs .
B. Web apps can be distributed through the iTunes Store.
C. Web apps provide better performance for graphics- or processor-intensive applications.
D. Web apps allow users to access new features and bug fixes without having to download a
new application.

Answer: D



QUESTION 3
What role does the Certificate Authority (CA) play in a server/client computing environment?

A. The CA establishes trust between two computers.
B. The CA must be present on a server before SSL can be enabled.
C. The CA determines what ciphers are available for symmetric encryption.
D. SSL routes traffic through the CA to verify the identity of server and client.

Answer: B


Practicetest 9L0-625 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-410 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-410 Apple it-exams

9L0-410 OS X Support Essentials 10.7 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-410 Apple it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
You type the host name, www.apple.com in Safaris address bar. If TCP/IP is configured manually, which name server does your Mac OS X v10.7 computer query to identify the IP address that maps to that host?

A. The name server assigned to the apple.com domain by ICANN.
B. Any name server that resides on the MacOS X v10.7computers local subnet.
C. Any name server on the same network router as the MacOS X v10.7computer.
D. A name server specified in the MacOS X v10.7computers System Preferences.
Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
You are setting up a Mac OS X v10.7 computer that will be installed in a public space. You want anyone to be able to log in and use Safari, but you do NOT want any personal files or data to remain on the computer after a user logs out. Which type of user account should you use for this purpose?

A. Root
B. Guest
C. Standard
D. Sharing Only

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which type of server is NOT accessible using the Finders Connect to Server command?

A. AFP
B. FTP
C. SMB
D. NFS
E. RTSP
F. WebDAV

Answer: E

Practicetest 9L0-410 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-510 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-510 Apple it-exams

9L0-510 Mac OS X Server Essentials 10.6 200 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-510 Apple it-exams

QUESTION 1
Review the image, and then answer the question below.
You have managed the Dock preferences to define where on the computer screen the Dock will appear for these four accounts: Lab (a computer group), Science (a computer in the Lab computer group), Teachers (a workgroup), and John (a member of the Teachers workgroup). When John logs in on the Science computer, where on the computer screen does the Dock appear?

A. bottom of the screen
B. left side of the screen
C. right side of the screen
D. John will be prompted to choose whether his user preferences or the Teachers workgroup preferences
should be used. The Dock will appear at the location of his choice.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
A MacBook computer running Mac OS X v10.6 was formerly managed, but its managed preferences have been disabled on the server. Still, the user is unable to change some preferences on the MacBook. Which statement presents a valid method for restoring the user's access to these preferences?

A. Delete the /Library/Managed Preferences/ folder.
B. Delete the MCX attributes from the user records in the NetInfo database.
C. Deselect the Managed Accounts option in the Services pane of Directory Utility.
D. Deselect the Managed Accounts option in the Accounts pane of System Preferences.

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
You used workgroup manager to define a set of managed preferences for the Guest Computer account on a Mac OS X Server v10.6 computer To which of the computers described below will those prefenences apply?
Choose two.

A. To any comuter on the local area network that is not bount to the server.
B. To any bound computer that does not have a computer record on the server.
C. To any bound computer from which a user connects to the server with the guest account.
D. To computers that are members of a computer list that has guest access to the server.
E. To any bound computer with no managed settings in its computer record, or in any computer group to
which its computer record belongs.

Answer: BE

Practicetest 9L0-510 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-152 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-152 Adobe it-exams

9A0-152 Adobe After Effects CS5 ACE Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9A0-152 Adobe it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
You are unable to set a color profile for a selected footage item in the project window, because the menu is grayed out. What should you do to enable color management and assign profiles?

A. change the project ColorSettingsto16or 32bpc
B. enable Pixel Aspect RatioCorrection in the composition window
C. assign a Working Space to the project in the Project Settings dialog
D. choose a presetbased on video resolution in the CompositionSettings dialog

Answer: D



QUESTION NO: 2
What is the most reliable way to keep colors within the broadcast safe range for your output?

A. Apply the Hue/Saturation effort andreduce the Master saturation to -5
B. Render to a format that supports trillions of colors, such asa DPX/CineonSequence
C. Use color management featuresto specify the output color profile accordingly, such as SDTV(Rec. 601 NTSC)
D. Change the Color Settings of the project to 32 bits per channel color depth

Answer: C



QUESTION NO: 3
What are three benefits when you choose to work in 32 bits per channel Color Depth?
(Choose three.)

A. A large latitude of colors to work with, and less likely to lose color definition and detail on export
B. Gradientslook much smoother without banding artifacts
C. You can work withinformation values that are above white and below black (negativeand positive informationof colors values)
D. You have moreeffects to choose from
E. You can address possiblevalues ranging from -327B8 to 32767 for each color channel
F. More colors are visible whenyou view your composition on devices other than your computer monitor

Answer: A,B,C
Practicetest 9A0-152 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-009 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-009 Apple it-exams

9L0-009 Macintosh Service Certification Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-009 Apple it-exams

QUESTION 1
You must provide your identity when you use Apple's Business Conduct Helpline. You may not contact the Helpline anonymously.

A. True
B. False

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
Which of the following is NOT a valid example of the type of information that Apple collects from its customers?

A. Credit card information.
B. Discussion blog postings mentioning Apple.
C. Apple product serial number and date of purchase.
D. Name, mailing address, phone number, email address.

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
Which THREE of the following components should you be very careful with, when working inside an Apple portable? SELECT THREE

A. Plastic tab
B. Small screw
C. Ribbon cable
D. Deflection coil
E. Anode aperture
F. Flyback transformer

Answer: ABC

Practicetest 9L0-009 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-407 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 9L0-407 Apple it-exams

9L0-407 Mac Integration Basics 10.7 Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9L0-407 Apple it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
What term best describes the OS X feature that restricts the system resources, such as files, that an application can access?

A. Execute disable
B. Sandboxing
C. Firewall
D. Library randomization

Answer: B

Reference: http://whitepapers.hackerjournals.com/wp-content/uploads/2011/02/Mac-OS-XSecurity.
pdf (page 10)


QUESTION NO: 2
You have installed Boot Camp and Windows on your Mac. Which Windows tool lets you set up the Mac to boot into OS X by default?

A. Mac OS Startup utility
B. Boot Camp utility
C. Windows Boot Camp control panel
D. Windows Startup control panel

Answer: C

Reference: http://support.apple.com/kb/HT3777

QUESTION NO: 3
Diego wants to run a Windows-based application on a MacBook Pro. What is a valid reason for him to use Boot Camp to do so, rather than a virtual solution, like Parallels or VMWare Fusion?

A. Boot Camp lets Diego switch between OS X and Windows applications instantly, whereas virtual solutions require Diego to restart his MacBook Pro in order to switch between the two environments and their applications.
B. Boot Camp does NOT require Diego to buy and install Windows in order to run Windows-based applications, whereas virtual solutions do.
C. Boot Camp runs natively without hardware-resource contention on Mac computers, so Diego will see better overall performance with Boot Camp than with virtual solutions.
D. Diego can buy Boot Camp on the App Store for $9.99, which is less expensive than the virtual solutions.

Answer: C

Practicetest 9L0-407 Apple it-exams

Practicetest 3I0-008 ACI it-exams

Practicetest 3I0-008 ACI it-exams

3I0-008 ACI DEALING CERTIFICATE our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 3I0-008 ACI it-exams

QUESTION 1
Click on the Exhibit Button to view the Formula Sheet. When using legal documentation,
proposed modifications:

A. Should be documented as soon as possible after a deal is done.
B. Should be clearly stated before a deal.
C. Can be agreed verbally.
D. Are not permissible.

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
Click on the Exhibit Button to view the Formula Sheet.What are IMMdates?

A. The 10th of March, June, September and December.
B. The third Wednesdays of January, April, July and October.
C. The Mondays before the third Wednesdays of March, June, September and December.
D. The third Wednesdays of March, June, September and December.

Answer: D


QUESTION 3
Click on the Exhibit Button to view the Formula Sheet. How could your firm avoid the risks of dealing through an agent with an unknown principal?

A. Insist on a guarantee by the intermediary.
B. Have the intermediary identify the principal to the compliance, legal or credit functions, but only give codes to your dealers.
C. It is not possible to avoid these risks unless you demand that the principal is
identified before each transaction.
D. In practice, the risks are minimal provided you deal through a reputable agent.

Answer: B

Practicetest 3I0-008 ACI it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-144 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-144 Adobe it-exams

9A0-144 Adobe Illustrator CS5 ACE Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9A0-144 Adobe it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
You have an object selected on your artboard which has a gradient. Which feature lets you view the name and type (Radial or Linear) of the selected object gradient?

A. Choose Window > Info panel.
B. Choose Window > Document info.
C. Choose File > File Info.
D. Choose Window > Control.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
You want to save your custom flattener settings as a preset. From which two areas can you do this? (Choose two.)

A. The Advanced section of the Print dialog box.
B. The Flattener Preview panel.
C. The Transparency area in the Document Setup dialog box.
D. The Object > Flatten Transparency command.
E. The Transparency area in the Save As EPS dialog box.

Answer: B,D


QUESTION NO: 3
You have created a document that uses layers and transparency. You now want to save that document as a PDF document and flatten all layers and transparency. You choose File > Save As and select Adobe PDF. Which method should you choose in the Save Adobe PDF dialog box?

A. [PDF/X-3:2002] from the Standard menu.
B. [PDF/X-4:2008] from the Standard menu.
C. [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset menu.
D. [Smallest File Size] from the Adobe PDF Preset menu.

Answer: A

Practicetest 9A0-144 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-150 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 9A0-150 Adobe it-exams

9A0-150 Adobe Photoshop CS5 ACE Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 9A0-150 Adobe it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
You have a photograph of a skyscraper in which the building appears tilted to the left. You'd like to straighten the building vertically and crop away any resulting transparent pixels in as few steps as possible. What should you do?
A. Drag the Ruler tool along the edge of the skyscraper, then click the Straighten button in the Options bar.
B. Drag the Ruler tool along the building edge; then choose Image > Image Rotation > Arbitrary.
C. Drag the Crop tool over fee image, rotate the bounding box so that one edge is in line with the building edge, and press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
D. Hold down the Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) key while dragging fee line tool along fee building edge; then press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS).
Answer: A

QUESTION NO: 2
You need to add copyright metadata to hundreds of images. Which is the most efficient way to do this?
A. Create an action in Photoshop.
B. Use a metadata template in Bridge.
C. Choose File > Automate > Batch in Photoshop.
D. Use the File Info dialog box in Bridge.
Answer: B

QUESTION NO: 3
You are on a Windows computer, and you want to use a Photoshop plug-in that work only in 32-bit mode. How do you run Photoshop CS5 for windows as a 32-bit application?
A. Install both a 32-bit and a 64-bit version of Photoshop. Switch them by quitting one version of Photoshop and launching the other.
B. Right-click the Photoshop application icon, and choose properties from the context menu.
C. Change the Display Mode of your monitor to a lower resolution
D. Allocate more RAM to Photoshop in Photoshop preferences.
Answer: A


Practicetest 9A0-150 Adobe it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-871 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-871 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-871 MySQL 5.0 Developer Certified Professiona Exam, Part I our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-871 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
Which of the following are correct? A REPLACE statement may be used...

A. ... in place of a combination of DELETE and INSERT statements.
B. ... when the replacement of rows must be done in one atomic operation.
C. ... only on MyISAM tables.
D. ... only by the root user.

Answer: AB



QUESTION 2
Is the following statement true or false? "Connector/ODBC can only connect to a MySQL server via TCP/IP; named pipes and sockets are not supported because they are operating system specific."

A. true
B. false

Answer: B



QUESTION 3
Where should a MySQL Connector be installed?

A. On the client-side host.
B. On the MySQL server host.

Answer: A

Practicetest 1Z0-871 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-872 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-872 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-872 MySQL 5.0 Developer Certified Professional Exam, Part II our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-872 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
Complete the following sentence. The infofmation_schema. schemata table contains information about

A. the table structure for all databases.
B. all of the tables, triggers and views for every database.
C. all of the databases on the server, such as name, character set and collation.
D. every database's structure including tables, triggers, stored routines, views, etc.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
Will the following select query list all of the tables in the information_schema database? If not, why?

SELECT TABLE_NAME FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA.TABLES WHERE TABLE_SCHEMA =
'INFORMATION_SCHEMA' ORDER BY TABLE_NAME

A. Yes.
B. No; the INFORMATION_SCHEMA database does not contain information on itself.
C. No; the WHERE clause is incorrect. The correct field name is TABLE_SCHEMATA.
D. No; there is no table in the INFORMATION SCHEMA database called TABLES.

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
Which of the following methods can be used to find out which character sets are in use across the server?

A. SHOW CHARACTER SETS
B. Use the INFORMATION_SCHEMA.COLUMNS table
C. This can not be done

Answer: B

Practicetest 1Z0-872 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z1-053 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z1-053 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z1-053 Oracle Database 11g: Administration II our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z1-053 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
Which options would you consider while configuring a flash recovery area (fast recovery area in 11g Release 2) for your production database that is running in ARCHIVELOG mode? (Choose all that apply.)

A. Setting the FAST_START_MTTR_TARGET to set the mean time to recover
B. Setting the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM parameter to twice the number of CPUs
C. Using the DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST parameter to set the location for flash recovery area
D. Using the DB_RECOVERY_FILE_DEST_SIZE parameter to define the disk space limit for the
recovery files created in the flash recovery area

Answer: CD



QUESTION 2
You want to take a complete database backup using RMAN. The backup should consist only the used blocks from your database.

Which two statements are true about this backup operation? (Choose two.)

A. Backup compression should be enabled
B. Parallelism for the channel should be set to 2
C. All the files must be backed up as backup sets
D. The backup may be stored either on disk or on media with media manager

Answer: CD


QUESTION 3
Which two statements are true about the Automatic Diagnostic Repository (ADR)? (Choose two.)

A. The ADR base keeps all diagnostic information in binary format
B. SQL*Plus provides the ADRI script, which can be used to work with ADR
C. The ADR can be used for problem diagnosis only when the database is open
D. The ADR can be disabled by settting the DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter to null
E. The ADR can be used for problem diagnosis even when the database instance is down
F. The ADR base is shared across multiple instances

Answer: EF

Practicetest 1Z1-053 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-850 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-850 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-850 Java Standard Edition 5 and 6, Certified Associate Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-850 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which technology is used to develop components that interact with server-side objects in a webbased
application?
A. XML
B. servlets
C. HTML
D. JavaScript
Answer: B

QUESTION NO: 2
Which is true?
A. JSP developers must learn Java programming to create JavaServer Pages.
B. JavaServer Pages are translated into servlets before they are executed.
C. JSP technology output is never displayed to clients.
D. JSP is defined as JavaScript Pages.
Answer: B

QUESTION NO: 3
Which three compile without error? (Choose three.)
A. String str = 'Hello';
B. String str = "Hello";
C. String str = "Hello" - " World!";
D. String str = new String("Hello");
E. String str = "Hello" + " World!";
F. String str = new String('Hello');
Answer: B,D,E

Practicetest 1Z0-850 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-851 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-851 Oracle it-exams


1Z0-851 Java Standard Edition 6 Programmer Certified Professional Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-851 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
A team of programmers is involved in reviewing a proposed design for a new utility class. After some discussion, they realize that the current design allows other classes to access methods in the utility class that should be accessible only to methods within the utility class itself. What design issue has the team discovered?

A. Tight coupling
B. Low cohesion
C. High cohesion
D. Loose coupling
E. Weak encapsulation
F. Strong encapsulation

Answer: E


QUESTION 2
Given a method that must ensure that its parameter is not null:

11. public void someMethod(Object value) {
12. // check for null value
...
20. System.out.println(value.getClass());
21. }

What, inserted at line 12, is the appropriate way to handle a null value?

A. assert value == null;
B. assert value != null, "value is null";
C. if (value == null) { throw new AssertionException("value is null"); }
D. if (value == null) { throw new IllegalArgumentException("value is null"); }

Answer: D

QUESTION 3
Given:

public class Target {
private int i = 0;
public int addOne() {
return ++i;
}
}

And:

public class Client {
public static void main(String[] args){
System.out.println(new Target().addOne());
}
}

Which change can you make to Target without affecting Client?

A. Line 4 of class Target can be changed to return i++;
B. Line 2 of class Target can be changed to private int i = 1;
C. Line 3 of class Target can be changed to private int addOne(){
D. Line 2 of class Target can be changed to private Integer i = 0;

Answer: D

Practicetest 1Z0-851 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-860 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-860 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-860 Java Enterprise Edition 5 Business Component Developer Certified Professional Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-860 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
A session bean calls the setRollbackOnly method on the EJBContext interface within a business method with an active transaction. Which two are correct? (Choose two.)

A. The transaction timeout is immediately disabled.
B. The container will ensure that the transaction will never commit.
C. The bean must have started the current transaction for this to be legal.
D. The bean must have bean-managed transaction demarcation for this to be legal.
E. Thebean must have container-managed transaction demarcation for this to be legal.

Answer: B,E


QUESTION NO: 2
A developer is working on a user registration application using EJB 3.0. A business method registerUser in stateless session bean RegistrationBean performs the user registration.
The registerUser method executes in a transaction context started by the client. If some invalid user data causes the registration to fail, the client invokes registerUser again with corrected data using the same transaction. Which design can meet this requirement?

A. Have registerUser method call EJBContext.setRollbackOnlyOmethodafter registration fails.
B. Have registerUser method throw javax.ejb.EJBTransactionRequiredExceptionafterregistration
fails.
C. HaveregisterUser method throw EJBException without marking the transaction for rollback, after registration fails.
D. Create an application exception withtherollbackattributeset to falseandhave registerUser method throwit afterregistration fails.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
Given:
11. @PersistenceContext EntityManager em;
12. public boolean test(Order o) {
13. boolean b = false;
14. o = em.merge(o);
15 em.remove(o);
16. o = em.merge(o);
17. b = em.contains(o);
18. return b;
19.}
Which statement is correct?

A. The method will return TRUE.
B. Themethod will return FALSE.
C. Themethodwill throw an exception.
D. TheOrder instance willberemoved from the database.

Answer: C

Practicetest 1Z0-860 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-821 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-821 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-821 Oracle Solaris 11 System Administrator our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-821 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
The advantage of core tiles is that they allow you an opportunity to examine the cause of
problems, so that they can be resolved.
However, core files must be managed because they_____.

A. take up large amounts of disk space
B. make numerous entries into the /var/adm/wtmpx file
C. steal resources from the processor, slowing down system performance
D. fill up swap space; this will begin to slow the system due to swaps
E. fill up swap space; this will begin to slow the system due to paging

Answer: A

Explanation: Part of the job of cleaning up heavily loaded file systems involves locating and removing files that have not been used recently. You can locate unused files by using the ls or find commands.
Other ways to conserve disk space include emptying temporary directories such as the directories located in /var/tmp or /var/spool, and deleting core and crash dump files.
Note: Core files are generated when a process or application terminates abnormally. Core files are managed with the coreadm command.
For example, you can use the coreadm command to configure a system so that all process core files are placed in a single system directory. This means it is easier to track problems byexamining the core files in a specific directory whenever a process or daemon terminates abnormally.
Reference: Oracle Solaris Administration: Common Tasks, Finding and Removing Old or Inactive Files


QUESTION NO: 2
The line
set noexec_user_stack= l
should be added to the /etc/system file to prevent an executable stack while executing user programs. What is the purpose of this?

A. help prevent core dumps on program errors
B. help programs to execute more quickly by keeping to their own memory space
C. log any messages into the stack log
D. help make buffer-overflow attacks more difficult

Answer: D

Explanation: How to Disable Programs From Using Executable Stacks
Purpose: Prevent executable stack from overflowing.
You must be in the root role.
Edit the /etc/system file, and add the following line:
set noexec_user_stack=1
Reboot the system.
# reboot
Reference: How to Disable Programs From Using Executable Stacks


QUESTION NO: 3
User jack makes use of the bash shell; his home directory is/export/home/jack.
What is the correct setting of umask, and where should it be set, to allow jack to create a shell script using the vi editor, that is executable by default?

A. It is not possible to make a script executable without using the chmod command.
B. umask value of 0002 set in /etc/profile
C. umask value of 0002 set in /export/home/jack/.bashrc
D. umask value of 0722 set in /etc/profile
E. umask value of 0722 set In /export/home/jack/.bashrc

Answer: B

Practicetest 1Z0-821 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-804 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-804 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-804 Java SE 7 Programmer II Exam our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-804 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Given:
import java.io.File;
import java.nio.file.Path;
public class Test12 {
static String displayDetails(String path, int location) {
Path p = new File(path).toPath();
String name = p.getName(location).toString();
return name;
}
public static void main(String[] args) {
String path = "project//doc//index.html";
String result = displayDetails(path,2);
System.out.print(result);
}
}
What is the result?

A. doc
B. index.html
C. an IllegalArgumentException is thrown at runtime.
D. An InvalidPthException is thrown at runtime.
E. Compilation fails.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Given the code fragment:
public void otherMethod() {
printFile("");
}
public void printFile(String file) {
try (FileInputStream fis = new FileInputStream(file)) {
System.out.println (fis.read());
} catch (IOException e) {
e.printStackTrace();
}
Why is there no output when otherMethod is called?

A. An exception other than IOException is thrown.
B. Standard error is not mapped to the console.
C. There is a compilation error.
D. The exception is suppressed.

Answer: D

Explanation: The code compiles fine
The line FileInputStream fis = new FileInputStream(file))
will fail at runtime since file is an empty string.
Note:
public void printStackTrace()
Prints this throwable and its backtrace to the standard error stream.


QUESTION NO: 3
Given the code fragment:
public void ReadFile (String source) {
char[] c = new char [128];
int cLen = c.length;
try (FileReader fr = new FileReader (source)) {
int count = 0;
int read = 0;
while ((read = fr.read(c)) != -1) {
count += read;
}
System.out.println("Read: " + count + " characters.");
} catch (IOException i) {
}
What change should you make to this code to read and write strings instead of character arrays?

A. ChangeFileReader to Readers.
B. ChangeFileReader to DataReader.
C. ChangeFileReader to File.
D. ChangeFileReader to BufferReader.

Answer: D

Practicetest 1Z0-804 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-536 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-536 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-536 Oracle Exadata 11g Essentials our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-536 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
When do you specify the type of interleaving for a grid disk?

A. When you create the cell disk
B. When you create the grid disk
C. Through ASM
D. When you create a tablespace

Answer: C

Explanation: Automatic Storage Management (ASM) is the storage management foundation of Exadata. ASM virtualizes the storage resources and provides the advanced volume management and file system capabilities of Exadata. Striping database files evenly across the available Exadata cells and disks results in uniform I/O load across all the storage hardware. The ability of ASM to perform non-intrusive resource allocation, and reallocation, is a key enabler of the shared grid storage capabilities of Exadata environments. And the ASM mirroring and failure group functionality provides much of the data protection and resiliency across the Exadata environment.
With ASM, data is mirrored across cells to ensure high availability in the event of cell failure.
http://www.pythian.com/news/17905/physical-disk-cell-disk-grid-disk-and-asm-disk-in-exadata/


QUESTION NO: 2
Why would you reduce the default disk_repair_time parameter?

A. To extend the availability of your ASM disk groups.
B. To reduce the need for high redundancy
C. To reduce the amount of data collected for a fast resynch
D. To increase performance of an Exadata Storage Server.

Answer: C

Practicetest 1Z0-536 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-591 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-591 Oracle it-exams


1Z0-591 Oracle Business Intelligence Foundation Suite 11g Essentials our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-591 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Object Security controls access to Subject Areas, Tables, and Columns in OBIEE and can be implemented by using which method?

A. Single Sign-On (SSO)
B. Database Authentication
C. Business Logic Object Security
D. External Table Authentication
E. LDAP Authentication

Answer: C

Explanation: Object-level security controls the visibility to business logical objects based on a user's role. You can set up object-level security for metadata repository objects, such as subject areas and presentation folders, and for Web objects, such as dashboards and dashboard pages, which are defined in the Presentation Catalog.
1) Business logic object
This controls access to objects, such as:
* subject areas
* presentation tables
* presentation columns
For example, users in a particular department can view only the subject areas that belong to their department.
2) Web object security
This provides security for objects stored in the Web Catalog, such as dashboards, dashboard pages, folders, and reports. You can view only the objects for which you are authorized. For example, a mid-level manager may not be granted access to a dashboard containing summary information for an entire department.


QUESTION NO: 2
Which two steps are needed to set up Failover support for an OBIEE deployment?

A. Use Installer to affect Horizontal scale out of an existing instance
B. Employ WebLogic Enterprise Edition, licensed separately
C. Use Installer to set up separate single instances, then apply Horizontal scale out clustering
D. Apply OBIEE Clustering option
E. Leverage spare hardware capacity of single machine by using Verticalscale out option

Answer: A,D

Explanation: Horizonal Scaleout of System Components
* Used for adding additional managed servers (Java components) and
system components to an existing cluster
* Used for scalability and failover
* Set up via the Universal Installer > Scale Out BI System option


QUESTION NO: 3
When creating an initialization Block, which BI Administration function is used?
A. Variable Manager
B. Job Manager
C. Identity Manager
D. Projects Manager

Answer: A

Practicetest 1Z0-591 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-803 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-803 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-803 Java SE 7 Programmer I our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-803 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Given:
class Overloading {
int x(double d) {
System.out.println("one");
return 0;
}
String x(double d) {
System.out.println("two");
return null;
}
double x(double d) {
System.out.println("three");
return 0.0;
}
public static void main(String[] args) {
new Overloading().x(4.0)
}
}
What is the result?

A. One
B. Two
C. Three
D. Compilation fails

Answer: D

Explanation: overloading of the x method fails as the input argument in all three cases are
double.
To use overloading of methods the argument types must be different.
Note: The Java programming language supports overloading methods, and Java can distinguish between methods with different method signatures. This means that methods within a class can have the same name if they have different parameter lists


QUESTION NO: 2
The catch clause argument is always of type___________.

A. Exception
B. Exception but NOT including RuntimeException
C. Throwable
D. RuntimeException
E. CheckedException
F. Error

Answer: C

Practicetest 1Z0-803 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-055 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-055 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-055 Oracle Database 11g: New Features for 9i OCPs our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-055 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
You installed Oracle Database 11g and are performing a manual upgrade of the Oracle9i database. As a part of the upgrade process, you execute the following script:
SQL>@utlu111i.sql
Which statement about the execution of this script is true?

A. It must be executed from the Oracle Database 11g environment.
B. It must be executed only after the SYSAUX tablespace has been created.
C. It must be executed from the environment of the database that is being upgraded.
D. It must be executed only after AUTOEXTEND is set to ON for all existing tablespaces.
E. It must be executed from both the Oracle Database 11g and Oracle Database 9i environments.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
Which two statements about the SQL Management Base (SMB) are true? (Choose two.)

A. It contains only SQL profiles generated by SQL Tuning Advisor.
B. It stores plans generated by the optimizer using a stored outline.
C. It is part of the data dictionary and stored in the SYSAUX tablespace.
D. It is part of the data dictionary and stored in the SYSTEM tablespace.
E. It contains the statement log, the plan history, plan baselines, and SQL profiles.

Answer: CE



QUESTION 3
Which statement about the enabling of table compression in Oracle Database 11g is true?

A. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for direct loads only.
B. Compression can be enabled only at the table level for both direct loads and conventional DML.
C. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for conventional DML only.
D. Compression can be enabled at the table, tablespace, or partition level for both direct loads and
conventional DML.

Answer: D

Practicetest 1Z0-055 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-147 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-147 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-147 Oracle9i program with pl/sql our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-147 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
You want to create procedures, functions and packages Which privilege do you need?
A. EXECUTE CODE object privilege
B. CREATE ANY CODE object privilege
C. CREATE PACKAGE system privilege
D. CREATE PROCEDURE system privilege
E. CREATE FUNCTION, CREATE PROCEDURE, CREATE PACKAGE system privileges

Answer: D

Explanation/Reference:
The privilege CREATE PROCEDURE gives the grantee the right to create procedures, functions, and packages within their schema. This privilege does not give the right to drop or alter the program constructs.
Incorrect Answers
A, B & C are not valid object or system privileges.


QUESTION 2
You have created a stored procedure DELETE_TEMP_TABLE that uses dynamic SQL to remove a table in your schema. You have granted the EXECUTE privilege to user A on this procedure. When user A executes the DELETE_TEMP_TABLE procedure, under whose privileges are the operations performed by default?
A. SYS privileges
B. Your privileges
C. Public privileges
D. User A's privileges
E. User A cannot execute your procedure that has dynamic SQL.

Answer: B

Explanation/Reference:
When you create a procedure, it will be executed under the privileges of the creator, unless the procedure has the following statement AUTHID CURRENT_USER. If you specify AUTHID CURRENT_USER, the privileges of the current user are checked at run time, and external references are resolved in the schema of the current user. Like this example
SQL> CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE delete_temp_table(v_table varchar2)
2 AUTHID CURRENT_USER
3 IS
4 BEGIN
5 EXECUTE IMMEDIATE 'DROP TABLE '||V_TABLE;
6 END;
7 /
Procedure created.
If the procedure is create in this way then the EXECUTE IMMEDIATE statement will be execute under the privilege of the user who executes the procedure, but if we skip line 2 then the procedure will be executed under the privilege of the owner of the procedure.
Incorrect Answers
A: SYS privilege has nothing with is.
C: What is the public privileges? There is nothing called public privileges.
D: This will be true if the procedure contains the AUTHID CURRENT_USER.
E: There is no problem in having a dynamic SQL statement in Procedure.


QUESTION 3
When creating a function, in which section will you typically find the RETURN keyword?
A. HEADER only
B. DECLARATIVE
C. EXECUTABLE and HEADER
D. DECLARATIVE,EXECUTABLE and EXCEPTION HANDLING

Answer: C

Practicetest 1Z0-147 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-051 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-051 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-051 Oracle Database: SQL Fundamentals I our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-051 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
View the Exhibit and examine the data in the

The PROJ_TASK_DETAILS table stores information about tasks involved in a project and the relation between them.
The BASED_ON column indicates dependencies between tasks. Some tasks do not depend on the completion of any other tasks.

You need to generate a report showing all task IDs, the corresponding task ID they are dependent on, and the name of the employee in charge of the task it depends on.

Which query would give the required result?

A. SELECT p.task_id, p.based_on, d.task_in_charge
FROM proj_task_details p JOIN proj_task_details d
ON (p.based_on = d.task_id);
B. SELECT p.task_id, p.based_on, d.task_in_charge
FROM proj_task_details p LEFT OUTER JOIN proj_task_details d ON (p.based_on = d.task_id);
C. SELECT p.task_id, p.based_on, d.task_in_charge
FROM proj_task_details p FULL OUTER JOIN proj_task_details d ON (p.based_on = d.task_id);
D. SELECT p.task_id, p.based_on, d.task_in_charge
FROM proj_task_details p JOIN proj_task_details d
ON (p.task_id = d.task_id);

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
Which two statements are true regarding subqueries? (Choose two.)

A. A subquery can retrieve zero or more rows.
B. Only two subqueries can be placed at one level.
C. A subquery can be used only in SQL query statements.
D. A subquery can appear on either side of a comparison operator.
E. There is no limit on the number of subquery levels in the WHERE clause of a SELECT statement.

Answer: AD


Practicetest 1Z0-051 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-052 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-052 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-052 Oracle Database 11g: Administrator I our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-052 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Your database instance is currently configured to support 1,500 connections. The Web application that uses the database allows a large number of users to work with the database simultaneously.
Some users of the Web application do not interact with the server all the time. You want to
increase the scalability by configuring the database instance to handle more connections. As a DBA, which configuration would you set to support more than 1,500 connections at a time?

A. You would configure more listeners for the database.
B. You would configure the database in shared server mode to use the connection pooling feature.
C. You would increase the value of the PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET initialization parameter that assigns more session memory to users.
D. You would decrease the value of the PRIVATE_SGA resource limit in the profiles used by the users to accommodate more session information.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
Which two statements describe good practices for an application developer to reduce locking conflicts in Oracle database? (Choose two.)

A. Avoid coding unnecessary longrunning transactions.
B. Allow the database to handle locks in default locking mode.
C. Always explicitly code the locks as per the requirement of the application.
D. Allow escalation of row locks to block locks if too many row locks cause problem.

Answer: A,B


QUESTION NO: 3
These are points that describe the contents of different memory components:
1: Descriptive information or metadata about schema objects that are queried by using SQL statements
2: The runtime area for data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL) statements
3: Results of SQL queries and PL/SQL functions
4: Executable forms of SQL cursors, PL/SQL programs, and Java classes
5: The information necessary to reconstruct changes made to the database by a transaction
Which of these will be stored in the Shared Pool if the necessary configurations are done?

A. 1 and 2
B. 2 and 5
C. 1,3, and 4
D. 3,4 and 5
E. 1,2,3 and 4

Answer: C


Practicetest 1Z0-052 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-053 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-053 Oracle it-exams

1Z0-053 Oracle Database 11g: Administration II our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Practicetest 1Z0-053 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
Examine the following command used to perform incremental level 0 backup:

RMAN> BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 0 DATABASE;

To enable the block change tracking, after the incremental level 0 backup you issued the following command:

SQL> ALTER DATABASE ENABLE BLOCK CHANGE TRACKING USING FILE '/mydir/
rman_change_track.f';

To perform incremental level 1 cumulative backup, you issued the following command:

RMAN> BACKUP INCREMENTAL LEVEL 1 CUMULATIVE DATABASE;

Which two statements are true in the above situation? (Choose two.)

A. The block change tracking data will be used only from the next incremental 0 backup.
B. The incremental backup will use change tracking data for accomplishing the backup.
C. The incremental backup will not use change tracking data for accomplishing the backup.
D. The block track file will scan all the blocks and create bitmap for all the blocks backed up in the level 0
backup.

Answer: AC
Section: Backup, Recovery & Recovery Manager (RMAN)

Explanation/Reference:
Section: Backup, Recovery & Recovery Manager (RMAN)

http://www.pythian.com/documents/Pythian-oracle-block-change.pdf After enabling change tracking, the first level 0 incremental backup still has to scan the entire datafile, as the change tracking file does not yet reflect the status of the blocks. Subsequent incremental backup that use this level 0 as parent will take advantage of the change tracking file. When some a chunk needs to be marked dirty for the first time after incremental backup, version information in bitmap extent headers (X$KRCFBH) is initialized - XFLAGS is set to 2, CURR_VERCNT and CURR_VERTIME
filled from datafile descriptor. If file had no changes since last incremental backup - nothing is written to the bitmap. There is no difference in handling different backup levels. Version is created in the same way whether its level 0, level 1 or level 4 backup. By the way, it seems that Oracle 10g documentation officially mentions only support for levels 0 and 1. However, I checked incremental backup levels up to 4 and they do work (10.2.0.2). Oracle Press 1Z1-053 Exam Guide, Chapter 4: Creating RMAN Backups The first incremental level 0 backup reads every block in the datafile, and subsequent incremental level 1 backups use the block change tracking file. No reference to create bitmap found. http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B19306_01/backup.102/b14192/bkup004.htm#i1032148

RMAN's change tracking feature for incremental backups improves incremental backup performance by recording changed blocks in each datafile in a change tracking file. If change tracking is enabled, RMAN uses the change tracking file to identify changed blocks for incremental backup, thus avoiding the need to scan every block in the datafile. Using change tracking in no way changes the commands used to pe form incremental backups, and the change tracking files themselves generally require little maintenance after initial configuration.



QUESTION 2
You want to use the automatic management of backup and recovery operations features for your database.

Which configuration must you set?

A. Enable the flash recovery area and specify it as the archived redo log destination.
B. Disable the flash recovery area and start the database instance in ARCHIVELOG mode.
C. Enable the flash recovery area but do not specify it as the archived redo log destination.
D. Disable the flash recovery area and start the database instance in NOARCHIVELOG mode.

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
Which three types of files can be automatically placed in the flash recovery area (fast recovery area in 11g Release 2)? (Choose three.)

A. Alert log file
B. Archived redo log files
C. Control file autobackups
D. Server Parameter file (SPFILE)
E. Recovery Manager (RMAN) backup piece

Answer: BCE

Practicetest 1Z0-053 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-033 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-033 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-033 Oracle9i Database: Performance Tuning our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-033 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION 1
In your test database, you want to automatically collect database statistics at regular intervals. You execute the spauto.sql script to automate this task. What must you ensure before executing this script?

A. The AQ_TM_PROCESSES parameter is set to a value higher than one.
B. The THREAD parameter is set to a nonzero value.
C. The OPTIMIZER_MODE parameter is set to CHOOSE.
D. The JOB_QUEUE_PROCESSES parameter is set to a nonzero value.
E. The LOCK_SGA parameter is set to TRUE.

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
You receive complaints from database users about performance degradation. On investigation, you find that this is due to unnecessary sort operations in the database. Which are the two operations that would reduce sorting? (Choose two.)

A. using UNION instead of UNION ALL, wherever possible
B. using sort-merge join instead of the nested-loop join
C. using ANALYZE command for large objects with ESTIMATE clause instead of COMPUTE
D. creating indexes on the columns that are used in equijoins

Answer: CD

QUESTION 3
While doing a routine performance check of your test database, you find that a large number of statements are getting invalidated in the library cache, thereby causing the statements to be reparsed. What could be the reason for the invalidations?

A. Statistics have not been collected on the referenced columns.
B. There is not enough free space in the Shared Pool.
C. The structures of dependent objects have been modified.
D. Stored outlines are being used.
E. The Shared Pool Reserved Space is not configured.

Answer: C

QUESTION 4
Which statement could require a sort?

A. SELECT DISTINCT dept_id
FROM emp:
B. UPDATE emp SET salary=salary*1.1
WHERE id=7722;
C. SELECT emp_id, name
FROM emp
WHERE emp-id=7722;
D. SELECT emp_id, name
FROM emp
WHERE emp_id BETWEEN7722and7100;

Answer: A

Practicetest 1Z0-033 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-042 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-042 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-042 Oracle Database 10g: Administration I our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-042 Oracle it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
A user receives the following error while executing a query:
ORA-01555: snapshot too old
Which two options can be the solutions to avoid such errors in future? (Choose two.)
A. increase the size of the Database Buffer Cache
B. increase the size of the default temporary tablespace
C. increase the size of redo log files
D. increase the size of the undo tablespace
E. enable the retention guarantee for the undo tablespace
Answer: D,E

QUESTION NO: 2
What are the consequences of executing the SHUTDOWN ABORT command? (Choose two.)
A. The database files are synchronized.
B. The database is closed, but the instance is still started.
C. The database undergoes automatic media recovery during the next startup.
D. Database buffers and redo buffers are not written to the disk.
E. Uncommitted changes are not rolled back.
Answer: D,E

QUESTION NO: 3
The SAVE_AMT column in the ACCOUNTS table contains the balance details of customers in a
bank. As part of the year-end tax and interest calculation process, all the rows in the table need to
be accessed. The bank authorities want to track access to the rows containing balance amounts
exceeding $200,000, and then send an alert message to the administrator. Which method would
you suggest to the bank for achieving this task?
A. performing standard database auditing to audit SQL statements with granularity level set to
ACCESS
B. implementing value-based auditing by using triggers
C. performing standard database auditing to audit object privileges by setting the AUDIT_TRAIL
parameter to EXTENDED
D. implementing fine-grained auditing with audit condition and event handler
Answer: D

Practicetest 1Z0-042 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-047 Oracle it-exams

Practicetest 1Z0-047 Oracle it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Z0-047 Oracle Database SQL Expert our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Z0-047 Oracle it-exams

1.Which two statements are true regarding the types of table joins available in Oracle Database
10g? (Choose two.)
A.You can use the JOIN clause to join only two tables.
B.You can explicitly provide the join condition with a NATURAL JOIN.
C.You can use the USING clause to join tables on more than one column.
D.You can use the ON clause to specify multiple conditions while joining tables.
Correct:C D

2.Which two statements are true regarding subqueries? (Choose two.)
A.The ORDER BY clause can be used in the subquery.
B.A subquery can be used in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement.
C.If the subquery returns NULL, the main query may still return result rows.
D.A subquery can be placed in a WHERE clause, GROUP BY clause, or a HAVING clause.
E.Logical operators, such as AND, OR and NOT, cannot be used in the WHERE clause of a subquery.
Correct:A B

3.Evaluate the following SQL statements in the given order: DROP TABLE dept; CREATE TABLE dept (deptno NUMBER(3) PRIMARY KEY, deptname VARCHAR2(10)); DROP TABLE dept; FLASHBACK TABLE dept TO BEFORE DROP; Which statement is true regarding the above FLASHBACK operation?
A.It recovers only the first DEPT table.
B.It recovers only the second DEPT table.
C.It does not recover any of the tables because FLASHBACK is not possible in this case.
D.It recovers both the tables but the names would be changed to the ones assigned in the RECYCLEBIN.
Correct:B

4.Given below is a list of functions and their purpose in random order. Function Purpose 1)NVL
a) Used for evaluating NOT NULL and NULL values 2)NULLIF b) Used to return the first non- null values in a list of expressions 3)COALESCE c) Used to compare two expressions. If both are same,
it returns NULL; otherwise, it returns only the first expression. 4)NVL2 d) Used to convert NULL
values to actual values Identify the correct combination of functions and their usage.
A.1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d B.1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a C.1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a D.1-d, 2-b, 3-c, 4-a Correct:B

Practicetest 1Z0-047 Oracle it-exams

Freitag, 21. Dezember 2012

why so cold.

why it is so cold in the winter. I looking forward the spring.

Beautiful Garden

Today I open my garden. good mood.

Welcom to here.

good morning. so many snow.

exam dumps 70-433 certification training

exam dumps 70-433certification training

Exam: Number/Code : 70-433
Exam: TS: Microsoft SQL Server 2008, Database Development
Version : Demo
QUESTION 1
You have a user named John. He has SELECT access to the Sales schema. You need to eliminate
John's SELECT access rights from the Sales.SalesOrder table without affecting his other permissions.
Which Transact-SQL statement should you use?

A. DROP USER John;
B. DENY SELECT ON Sales.SalesOrder TO John;
C. GRANT DELETE ON Sales.SalesOrder TO John;
D. REVOKE SELECT ON Sales.SalesOrder FROM John;

Answer: B


QUESTION 2
You need to create a column that allows you to create a unique constraint.
Which two column definitions should you choose? (Each correct answer presents a complete solution.
Choose two.)

A. nvarchar(100) NULL
B. nvarchar(max) NOT NULL
C. nvarchar(100) NOT NULL
D. nvarchar(100) SPARSE NULL

Answer: AC

exam dumps 70-433certification training

IT Certification 70-401 braindump

IT Certification 70-401 braindump

QUESTION 1
You install System Center Configuration Manager 2007 in your Active Directory environment.
You need to ensure that client agent installation automatically retrieves client deployment parameters from Active Directory Domain Services.
You extend the Active Directory schema. You create the System Management container. Which two actions should you perform? next(Each correct answer presents part of the solution. Choose two.)

A. Import the contents of the ConfigMgr_ad_schema.ldf file into Active Directory Domain Services.
B. Set security permissions on the System Management container.
C. Add the server account for the first installed site server to the Schema Admins global security group.
D. Enable Active Directory publishing for the Configuration Manager site.

Answer: BD

QUESTION 2
You have a Systems Management Server (SMS) 2003 environment. Your central site is in the United States, and you have a primary child site in Germany. The central site is running Microsoft Windows Server 2003 software for the English language. The primary child site is running Windows Server 2003 software for the German language.
You are upgrading your environment to System Center Configuration Manager 2007.
You need to enable the SMS Provider role for the primary child site.
What should you do?

A. Install the SMS Provider on the central site on the German version of Windows Server 2003.
B. Install the SMS Provider on the central site on the English version of Windows Server 2003.
C. Install the SMS Provider on the primary child site on the German version of Windows Server 2003.
D. Install the SMS Provider on the primary child site on the English version of Windows Server 2003.

Answer: C

IT Certification 70-401 braindump

practicetest 70-162 exam

Exam: Number/Code : 70-162
Exam: TS: Forefront Protection for Endpoints and Applications, Configuring
Version : Demo
QUESTION 1
Your network environment has System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) 2007.
The SCCM hierarchy is shown in the following table.

The MOW site has Forefront Endpoint Protection (FEP) 2010 installed. You plan to install FEP 2010 on the LON site.

You need to ensure that existing custom FEP policies will apply in the MOW site after the FEP installation on the LON site is complete.

What should you do?

A. Rename the FEP - Policies package.
B. Set the highest precedence to the custom policies on the MOW site.
C. Distribute the FEP - Policies package from the MOW site before the FEP installation on the LON
site is complete.
D. Export FEP policies from the MOW site before the FEP installation on the LON site is complete.
Import the policies into the LON site.

Answer: D
70-162 www.it-exams.com
QUESTION 2
Your network environment has System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) 2007 configured as a single site. The network has servers as shown in the following table.



You need to install the Forefront Endpoint Protection (FEP) 2010 Server by using the Basic topology.

Which role or roles should you install on SQL01? (Choose all that apply.)

A. FEP Database
B. FEP Reporting
C. FEP Security Client
D. FEP Reporting Database
E. FEP Console Extensions for Configuration Manager
F. FEP Site Server Extensions for Configuration Manager

Answer: ABD

70-162 www.it-exams.com

practicetest 050-710 exam

Exam: Number/Code : 050-710
Exam: Novell Certified Linux Administrator
Version : Demo
1. Why are the noauto and users options used with /etc/fstab?
A. A normal user is not allowed to access this partition.
B. They allow any user to mount and unmount a partition.
C. They specify the partitions that are bootable by a user.
D. They specify the partitions that are not bootable by a user.
Answer: B

050-710 050-710 050-710 www.it-exams.com
2. What information do you need to set up an LDAP client? (Choose 4.)
A. LDAP version
B. LDAP base DN
C. Kind of encryption
D. Synchronization frequency
E. Address of the LDAP server
F. File name of the LDAP database
Answer: ABCE

050-710 050-710 050-710 www.it-exams.com

Practicetest 1Y0-A26 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A26 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A26 Citrix XenServer 6.0 Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A26 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION: 1
Scenario: An administrator is troubleshooting a Provisioning services environment.
After the administrator configured a new version of the vDisk for 10 identical target
devices all running on the same XenServer host, the administrator discovers that only
the first target device started with the new vDisk configured. The other nine target
devices failed to startup. What is one of the steps the administrator should take to
resolve this issue?

A. Configure the PXE Service.
B. Configure the bootstrap file.
C. Restart the Stream Service.
D. Change the vDisk access mode.

Answer: D


QUESTION: 2
Scenario: An administrator is troubleshooting a Provisioning services farm that consists
of two identical servers and 100 identical target devices. From the Provisioning Services
Console the administrator notices that one of the provisioning servers has twice the
amount of target devices connected compared with the other provisioning server. The
vDisk used and the provisioning servers are configured to use high availability and load
balancing. What should the administrator check to correct load balancing?

A. Power Rating
B. Bootstrap options
C. vDisk access mode
D. Offline database support

Answer: A


QUESTION:3
Scenario: A virtual machine that uses Provisioning services is accidentally deleted by an
administrator. The administrator creates a new virtual machine from the same template
that was used to create the virtual machine deleted. However, the virtual machine is
NOT able to start up from the vDisk. What must the administrator do to resolve the issue?

A. Assign the correct vDisk to the target device.
B. Reconfigure the target device MAC address.
C. Configure the target device to start up from vDisk.
D. Create a target device for the new virtual machine.

Answer: B

Practicetest 1Y0-A26 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A20 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A20 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A20 Citrix XenApp 6.5 Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A20 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION 1
Scenario: A company is testing application streaming to allow workers to use their application offline. The application being tested is Adobe Reader. The test is successful and now the administrator need to stream Microsoft Office 2010 also. Users must be able to read PDF files that are attached to emails opened in Microsoft Outlook 2010.

Which action must the administrator take to meet the requirements of the scenario?

A. Publish the two applications with the same settings from the AppCenter.
B. Precache the two packages on the users' computer instead of streaming them at launch time.
C. Link the Adobe Reader streaming package to the Office 2010 streaming package during profiling
of the Office 2010 package.
D. When profiling, choose 'Advance Install - Select files and folders' and copy the application
executables from the two applications in to each application profile.

Answer: C



QUESTION 2
An administrator needs to ensure that new XenApp servers are automatically added to worker groups.

When creating a worker group, which two options could the administrator select to meet the requirements of the scenario? (Choose two.)

A. Application Folder
B. Load Security Group
C. XenApp Farm Server Group
D. Active Directory Server Group
E. Active Directory Organizational Unit

Answer: DE


QUESTION 3
Laptop users need to user a XenApp published application when they are disconnected from the corporate network.

Which two plugins should an administrator install and where should they be installed to meet the laptop user requirements? (Choose two.)

A. Citrix offline plug-in on the laptop
B. Citrix online plug-in on the laptop
C. Citrix streaming profiler on the laptop
D. Citrix offline plug-in on the XenApp server
E. Citrix online plug-in on the XenApp server
F. Citrix streaming profiler on the XenApp server

Answer: AB

Practicetest 1Y0-A20 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A22 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A22 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A22 Citrix XenApp 6.5 Advanced Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A22 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION: 1
Scenario: A Citrix XenApp 6.5 environment contains user devices, a Web interface site and a XenApp server farm with XenApp 6.5 servers. Users complains that they can log on, see published applications and start the applications but NO ICA connection is established. Which two options can the administrator configure on this environment so that the users can establish their ICA sessions? (Choose two)

A. Open the IMA port on all of the XenApp 6.5 servers
B. Open the ICA port on all of the XenApp 6.5 servers
C. Open the session reliability port on all of the XenApp 6.5 servers
D. Open the http port between the user device and Web Interface site
E. Open the XML port between the Web Interface site and data collector

Answer: A, E


QUESTION: 2
A user reports he has a poor internet connection, and his sessions are constantly dropped.
Which two actions should the XenApp Administrator complete for the users session to avoid the issue describer? (Choose two)

A. Disable sound
B. Disable printer mapping
C. Disable CPU Optimization
D. Disable Session Reliability

Answer: A, B


QUESTION: 3
Call center accessing a XenApp hosted desktop by means of this client devices are unable to see a new multi-function printer in their session.What can the administrator do to resolve this issue?

A. Enable the auto-create all client printers policy
B. Add the new printer to the session printer policy
C. Install the correct printer drivers on the XenApp servers
D. Verify that the new printers has been added to the default printer policy

Answer: B

Practicetest 1Y0-A22 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A24 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A24 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A24 Citrix XenServer 5.6 Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A24 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Scenario: An Exchange administrator is going to install a major service pack release. The
Exchange administrator asks the XenServer administrator to create a snapshot of a Windows
2008 server and keep it in a consistent state so the snapshot can be restored should something
go growing with the update.
Which two actions must the XenServer administrator take to complete this task? (Choose two)
A. Install the VSS Provider m the Windows Server virtual machine
B. Run xe vm-snapshot vrn=(vrn_uuid) new-name-label=(vm_snapshot_name)
C. Reconfigure the Microsoft VSS Service in the Windows Server virtual machine
D. Run xe vrrvsnapshot-with-quiesce vm=(vm_uuid) new-name-label=(vm_snapshot_name)
E. Run xe vm-snapshot-copy new-name-label=(vm_snapshot_name)
snapshot_uuid=(snapshot_uuid)
Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 2
Scenario: A XenServer host has high network utilization because replication software is running
on the virtual machine. An administrator needs to ensure the best performance of the virtual
machine and ensure that replication does NOT affect XenMotion triggered by Workload Balancing.
When two actions must the administrator take to meet the needs of the scenario? (Choose two)
A. Set Network Read as less important
B. Set Network Read as more important
C. Set Workload Balancing to 'Maximize Density
D. Set Workload Balancing to 'Maximize Performance'
Answer: A,D


QUESTION NO: 3
Scenario: An administrator needs to adjust the optimization mode for Workload Balancing. The
workload should be distributed equally across the physical hosts to improve the end user
experience in a resource pool at all times of the day.
When two settings must the administrator select when configuring the optimization mode?
(Choose two)
A. Fixed
B. Scheduled
C. Maximize Density
D. Maximize Performance
Answer: A,D

Practicetest 1Y0-A24 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A16 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A16 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A16 Architecting a Citrix Virtualization Solution our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A16 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION 1
Scenario: The architect for Healthy Helping Hands has identified that virtualizing the entire server infrastructure will provide the best return on investment (ROI) and lowest maintenance costs for the new infrastructure. In order to proceed with this recommendation, a monitoring strategy must be put in place to ensure that the virtualization platform does NOT become overloaded. Which virtualization component should an architect monitor to identify virtual desktop bottlenecks?

A. XenServer hosts
B. XenDesktop servers
C. Provisioning Services servers
D. XenApp servers

Answer: D


QUESTION 2
How can the architect identify if the XenApp servers are the source of a bottleneck?

A. Identify excessive CPU and memory consumption.
B. Identify excessive memory and network utilization
C. Identify excessive disk and network I/O.
D. Identify excessive disk I/O and page file utilization.

Answer: A


QUESTION 3
Why should CPU and memory consumption be used to identify bottlenecks?

A. Excessive CPU and memory consumption will slow the creation of new sessions.
B. Excessive CPU and memory consumption on the data collector will slow down Web Interface authentication.
C. Excessive CPU and memory consumption on the data collector will slow down application enumeration.
D. Excessive CPU and memory consumption on the XenApp server will affect the local host cache.

Answer: A


Practicetest 1Y0-A16 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A18 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A18 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A18 Basic Administration for Citrix XenApp 6 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A18 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Scenario. The IMA Service on a server failed to notice an update due to network problems.
As a result the local host cache is out of date.
Which command can the Administrator issue to force the local host cache to read all changes immediately from the data store ?
A. dsmaint
B. dscheck
C. query farm
D. query session

Answer: B

Explanation: The LHC dsmaint /recreatelhc will rebuild the Local Host Cache.
Incorrect answer:
Dscheck utility performs validation checks on a server farm's data store.

QUESTION NO: 2
Scenario: Some users complain that they are unable to access printers in their XenApp session. As part of troubleshooting the issue, the administrator plans to check the security setup. Where would the administrator check to ensure security is configured correctly ?
A. Users Profile
B. Local user workstation
C. %systemroot%\system32\temp
D. %systemroot%\system32\spool folder

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
Scenario: A user attempts to log on using the Web Interface, however the pass-through authentication fails alter known good credentials are entered from a windows client device. The message reads "An Authentication error has occurred with Web Interface in Windows Server 2008". The explicit logon works correctly with no issues and the administrator determines that the Windows Server 2008 has NOT been configured correctly.
which action should the administrator take to resolve the issue ?
A. Restart the IIS service.
B. Modify the XML Service port.
C. Add the user to the administrators group.
D. Modify the server role using Server Manager.

Answer: D


Practicetest 1Y0-A18 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A19 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A19 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A19 Citrix XenDesktop 5 Basic Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A19 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION 1
A help desk administrator is trying to view the CPU usage on a Windows XP desktop using Desktop Director. The help desk administrator can see the user's session including the online plug-in version and client IP address but cannot see any CPU activity.

What is the most likely cause for this issue?

A. Port 3389 is NOT open on the VDA
B. WinRM is NOT installed on the Windows XP desktop
C. The administrator has NOT been assigned to the desktop group
D. The user is NOT running any applications and the session is idle

Answer: B



QUESTION 2
A user tried to connect to a desktop through the Citrix online plug-in, but the connection was unsuccessful.

What could be the cause of this issue?

A. Port 2598 was closed
B. Port 3389 was closed
C. The virtual desktop requires a SSL certificate
D. Antivirus software is preventing the connection

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
The Virtual Desktop Agent (VDA) is not able to register with the Controller.

Which two common troubleshooting steps can resolve this issue? (Choose two)

A. Ensure the time is in sync between the VDA and the Controller
B. Confirm that the firewall is open for port 80 between the VDA and Controller
C. Check that the Controller connection state for the VDA is shown as Enabled
D. Validate that bot an IPv4 and IPv6 address is assigned for the VDA and the Controller

Answer: AB

Practicetest 1Y0-A19 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 00M-648 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-648 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-648 IBM Rational IT Sales Mastery Test v2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-648 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following highlights one of the key benefits System Architect brings to Enterprise Architecture Management?

A. Understanding how your technology assets relate and how they will be impacted by proposed changes.
B. Maximization and optimization of the budgets and investments over the IT portfolio.
C. Drive the strategy formulation process within the organization.
D. Take advantage of the capabilities of the Jazz platform.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
What is one of the main benefits that Rational Insight brings to Performance Management?

A. Detailed views in resource assignment to maximize capacity planning.
B. A top-down, value-driven investment optimization approach designed to be easy to deploy, use and adopt.
C. Strategic planning framework to help executives develop winning strategies.
D. Direct integration with Rational and 3rd parties Application Lifecycle Management tools.

Answer: C

Practicetest 00M-648 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 1K0-002 Polycom it-exams

Practicetest 1K0-002 Polycom it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1K0-002 Polycom Rational IT Sales Mastery Test v2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1K0-002 Polycom it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
What does CIF stand for?

A. Common Intermediate Format
B. Common Intermediate Form
C. Common International Format
D. Common International Form

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Which Task of TCP/IP is used to transport Audio and Video?

A. Address Resolution Protocol
B. Simple Network Management Protocol
C. Trivial File Transfer Protocol
D. User-Datagram Protocol
E. File Transfer Protocol

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 3
Which audio coding standard is mandatory for H.320 and H.323?

A. G.720
B. G.722
C. G.728
D. G.721
E. G.723.1
F. 729
G. G.722.1
H. G.711

Answer: H

Practicetest 1K0-002 Polycom it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A08 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A08 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A08 Advanced Administration for Citrix XenApp 5.0 for Windows for Windows Server 2008 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A08 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION 1
Which Citrix service directly depends on the IMA service?


A.WMI
B.Licensing
C.XTE Server
D.Print Manager

Answer: A

Practicetest 1Y0-A08 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A11 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 1Y0-A11 Citrix it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

1Y0-A11 Basic Administration for Citrix NetScaler 9.0 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 1Y0-A11 Citrix it-exams

QUESTION 1
An administrator is setting up high availability (HA) using the command line interface. Which additional step should the administrator take to configure HA when using the command line interface?

A. Reboot the primary node
B. Specify each interface number
C. Synchronize the SSL certificates, start up scripts and other configuration files on the
primary node
D. Manually disable the HA monitor for each interface that is not connected or not being
used for traffic

Answer: D



QUESTION 2
Scenario: The computers at a company were recently infected with the nimda virus. An administrator at the company plans to prevent this from happening again by using the content filtering feature of the NetScaler system to terminate a client connection when a possible instance of the nimda virus is detected. The administrator has already created a policy expression that will match traffic with ROOT.EXE or CMD.EXE and plans to use the NetScaler default "RESET" action to terminate the appropriate connections. In order to achieve the desired result, the administrator should __________ prior to binding the policy at the appropriate level. (Choose the correct phrase to complete the sentence.)

A. add the filter with the policy expression and the action specified
B. add the filter with the policy expression and then add the action to the filter
C. create the action and then add the filter with the policy expression and the action specified
D. create the action, add the filter, and then add the action and the policy expression to the filter

Answer: A



QUESTION 3
An administrator plans to configure a redirect URL for a load balancing virtual server so that requests are sent to the default page of the desired URL. When configuring the redirect URL, which format should the administrator use so that the request is sent to the correct page?

A. http://www.citrix.com
B. http://www.citrix.com/
C. http://www.citrix.com/index.html
D. http://www.citrix.com/%default%

Answer: B


Practicetest 1Y0-A11 Citrix it-exams

Practicetest 00M-638 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-638 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-638 IBM Lotus Notes & Domino Sales Mastery Test v2 (00M-638) our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-638 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
What statement best describes Project Vulcan?

A. The convergence of messaging capabilities into a flexible, comprehensive web-based offering,an Exceptional WebExperience.
B. The next release of Lotus Notes, the award-winning email and collaboration experience fromIBM.
C. IBM's multi-year strategy to be the standard for customer-facing Web experiences by bringing together social and web technologies.
D. The aggregation of different types of social information and social status into a single user experience, an Exceptional WorkExperience.

Answer: D

Reference:http://www.ibm.com/ru/events/lotusforum2010/prz/p/2_lf2010.pdf(slide 28)


QUESTION NO: 2
Which is NOT a recommended technique to deliver an effective sales presentation?

A. Make it passionate, by being excited about the story you are telling.
B. Make sure it is deeply and confusingly technical
C. Personalize it, by putting yourself in the story.
D. Make it as relevant as you can to the customer's situation.

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
How much does Notes Traveler cost to a current Notes Domino customer?

A. Free of charge to customers that are current on Notes and Domino
B. $29 per user to customers that are current on Notes and Domino
C. $29 per user per year to customers that are current on Notes and Domino
D. $79 per user to customers that are current on Notes and Domino

Answer: A

Reference:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IBM_Lotus_Notes_Traveler(Second paragraph, last sentence)


Practicetest 00M-638 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-641 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-641 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-641 IBM Exceptional Web Experience Sales Mastery Test v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-641 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which approach does IBM recommend for customers in delivering their Exceptional Web
Experience to mobile devices?

A. Browser based web applications -- use device browser to display content
B. Hybrid - use both web and native components to use native device features and utilize the browser interface to deliver content
C. Native only - develop a new app to make use of each new phone's native features
D. Develop only for iPhone since it is the market leader

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 2
What is the difference between a Toolbox and a Template?

A. Templates contain Toolboxes
B. Toolboxes contain Templates
C. Toolboxes cost more than Templates
D. Templates cost more than Toolboxes

Answer: B

Reference:http://www-01.ibm.com/software/websphere/portal/industry/


Practicetest 00M-641 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-642 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-642 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-642 ICS Social Software Sales Mastery Test v2 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-642 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which IBM product increases the speed of social businesses, and can be considered as the action behind social businesses, making them more nimble?

A. IBM Lotus Organizer
B. IBM Sametime
C. IBM Lotus Symphony
D. IBM Rational Application Developer

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
What is the best route for 'gaining social trust'?

A. Ask your supplier network to blog about their relationship with you.
B. Ask your employees to blog about your company in any of the blogs they participate in.
C. Identify and develop relationships with tippers in your industry.
D. Strive for the highest number of hits on your Web site.

Answer: C

Practicetest 00M-642 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-643 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-643 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-643 Information Management Solution Sales Mastery Test v4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-643 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
What is the purpose of accelerators in IBM InfoSphere Warehouse deployments?

A. to provide pre-defined assets that capture expertise and best practices relevant to the customer
B. to enhance hardware performance based on the customer’s workload
C. to pass incoming data over constantly running queries for analytics in real time
D. to speed up deployment time through automatic data source discovery and software integration

Answer: D

Reference: http://www-01.ibm.com/software/data/infosphere/warehouse/packs/ (first paragraph, Why IBM for Infosphere warehouse packs)


QUESTION NO: 2
What is a key functionality of IBM InfoSphere Information Server?

A. data cleansing and standardization
B. in-database analytics
C. data masking and encryption
D. in-memory cubing

Answer: A

Practicetest 00M-643 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M237 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M237 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-M237 IBM B2B Integration-Network-Managed File Transfer Sales Mastery Test v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-M237 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
The average enterprise has _______ integration platforms.

A. 5
B. 7
C. 12
D. 15

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the below is NOT a key strategic area of business value provided by IBM Sterling B2B Integrator?

A. Integrating partners and systems.
B. Eliminating manual processes
C. Accelerating B2B collaboration
D. Improving strategic decision making with real-time business process monitoring dashboard.
E. All of the above

Answer: E

Reference:
http://www-01.ibm.com/software/commerce/b2b/b2b-collaboration-network/
Explanation: Improving strategic decision making with real time business process monitoring dashboard is the feature of sterling B2B collaboration network and not of Sterling B2B integrator.


Practicetest 000-M237 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M240 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M240 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-M240 IBM Lotus Sametime Unified Telephony Sales Mastery Test v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-M240 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following is NOT a technology readiness indicator?
A. Participant in a recent merger or acquisition
B. Sametime Standard or Advanced customers
C. Autonomous IT and Telecom departments
D. Migrating to IP telephony

Answer: A

QUESTION NO: 2
UCC emphasizes the value of integrating ______________with voice communications
A. Messaging applications
B. Collaboration applications
C. Web Applications
D. Customer Relationship Management applications

Answer: B


Practicetest 000-M240 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-N23 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-N23 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

Our products of 000-N23 IBM Pure Application System Technical Sales Mastery Test v1 come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-N23 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Virtual system patterns allow you to customize the middleware topology to suit the need for automation during repeatable deployments. Which of the following best describes ways to achieve this goal?

A. Use of script packages and add-ons within your patterns
B. Use of the extend and capture feature with your virtual images
C. Use of Advanced Middleware Configuration (AMC) tool for onboarding your existing application
D. All of the above

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
how many management nodes are included with IBM PureApplication System?

A. One Master PureApplication System Management Node.
B. Four Management Nodes total - Two PureApplication System Management Nodes and Two VM Management Nodes
C. Two Management Nodes total - One PureApplication System Management Nodes and One VM Management Nodes
D. Six Management Nodes total - Two PureApplication System Management Nodes, Two VM Management Nodes, and Two PureFlex Management Nodes

Answer: B

Practicetest 000-N23 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-234 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 00M-234 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

00M-234 IBM Netezza Sales Mastery Test v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 00M-234 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
With workload management, you can set aside the _________________ and
__________________ amount of resources that a given user can have at any given time.

A. minimum and maximum
B. average and maximum
C. mean and standard deviation
D. minimum and average

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
During a host failure, what host-based data will be automatically available on the standby host?

A. All table data in every database.
B. Everything specified in the nzbackup.conf file.
C. Everything on the /nz and /export/home/nz partitions.
D. Nothing, the hosts have a shared-nothing architecture.
Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Which of the following components in a TwinFin appliance are NOT redundant?

A. Hard Drives
B. Power Supplies
C. Networking Cards
D. None of the above; all components are redundant.

Answer: D

Practicetest 00M-234 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M87 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M87 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-M87 IBM Netezza Technical Mastery Test v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-M87 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Which of the following statements is the LEAST accurate?

A. Skew can sometimes cause the optimizer to broadcast data during a query.
B. Skew can occur when more data in a table is on one disk than others due to a sub-optimal distribution key.
C. Skew can occur despite evenly distributed tables when more data ends up on one Snippet Processor while a query is being processed.
D. Skew can cause query performance problems.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following statements is MOST TRUE?

A. Statistics have no impact on ZoneMaps.
B. ZoneMaps are disabled for a table while Statistics are being run.
C. The ability to generate ZoneMaps and generate Statistics can both be assigned to users via permissions.
D. Statistics and ZoneMaps are both used by the optimizer to choose an optimal query plan.

Answer: B

Practicetest 000-M87 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M235 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M235 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-M235 IBM Tivoli Security Sales Mastery Test v4 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-M235 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
How does Tivoli Directory Server (TDS) help increase the number of Tivoli security wins, over time?

A. TDS is included in the packages for many Tivoli security solutions (TAMeb, TIM, TSIEM) and it enhances the package by offering a high performing, high availability user repository.
B. TDS customers get a discount for other Tivoli security products
C. Tivoli Directory Server is becoming ubiquitous (ever-present) and since Tivoli security products integrate with it, adding Tivoli security products to an operational environment becomes a much easier proposition.
D. TDS includes "try and buy" versions of the Tivoli security products

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 2
A client currently has IBM RealSecure Server Sensor protecting its Windows servers. What is the best product to which the client should migrate?
A. IBM Security ESC
B. IBM Security Server Protection
C. IBM Security VX
D. IBM Security Network IPS

Answer: B


QUESTION NO: 3
Which 4 customer IT security challenges are targeted by the Tivoli Security solutions?

A. Physical security, application security, network security, meta-security.
B. Organizational, process, mindshare and service-delivery challenges.
C. Lower security costs, prove you know whose accessing what, managing the insider threat, and getting out ahead of security threats in general.
D. Challenges related to healthcare, finance, insurance and government

Answer: C

Practicetest 000-M235 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M236 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-M236 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-M236 IBM Tivoli Storage Sales Mastery Test v3 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-M236 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Please choose correct answers of the following items:Fastback provide which of the following?
A. Reduce the amount of data at risk to almost zero.
B. Reduce the time to recover any amount of data to just minutes.
C. Tape support.
D. Provide a comprehensive backup and recovery solution for SMB and remote/branch offices.

Answer: A,B,D


QUESTION NO: 2
What doesTPC allow you to do?
A. Provide analytic reporting.
B. Improve administrator efficiency & storage utilization.
C. View only IBM disk.
D. Reduce complexity of multi-vendor environments

Answer: A,B,D


Practicetest 000-M236 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-781 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-781 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-781 PureFlex TechnicalSupport V1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-781 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
A customer is considering moving his data to a PureFlex System. Which of the following tools provides ROI?

A. TCO Now
B. Capacity Magic
C. PERFMON
D. SCON

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
A customer plans to have an IBM PureFlex System Standard with x240 and p260 nodes installed at a hosting facility where power usage is charged by consumption. 75% utilization is expected.
Which of the following can be used to provide power consumption for the chassis for budgeting purposes?

A. Energy Estimator
B. PowerLoad Magic
C. Power configurator
D. Sales Manuals for each component

Answer: C

Practicetest 000-781 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-919 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-919 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-919 Informix 11.70 System Administrator our product come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-919 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
Why do automatic checkpoints cause the database server to trigger more frequent checkpoints?

A. To avoid LRU flushes.
B. To ensure the buffer pool is always available.
C. To ensure theonstat -g ckp report is accurate.
D. To avoid transaction blocking during checkpoints.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
What two onconfig parameters will help improve performance of new network connections? (Choose two.)

A. NETTYPE
B. VPCLASS
C. NS_CACHE
D. FET_BUF_SIZE
E. NUMFDSERVERS

Answer: C,E


QUESTION NO: 3
Without explicitly setting DBSPACETEMP and TEMPTABLE_NOLOG, where will temporary tables be created by default? (Choose three.)

A. The rootdbspace.
B. The users' home directory.
C. The $INFORMIXDIR/tmp directory.
D. Thedbspace in which the active database was created.
E. The /tmp directory or PSORT_DBTEMP.

Answer: A,D,E

Practicetest 000-919 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-152 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-152 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-152 System x Technical Principles V10 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-152 ibm it-exams

QUESTION 52
Which statements is true about Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) for System x servers?

A. PFA is embedded in selected server components and requires no action for being enabled
B. PFA is available only when the Server Plus Pack is installed on the server
C. PFA is available only when a Virtual Media Key is present
D. PFA is available when the related setting is turned on in UEFI settings

Answer: A


QUESTION 53
A retail customers application environment requires 32 memory slots and four processors to run scientific, and technical computing, financial, weather simulation, and life sciences. Which of the following System x server meets these needs at minimum cost?

A. x3850 X5
B. x3550 M3
C. HX5
D. x3650 M3

Answer: A


QUESTION 54
A customer needs maximum performance with fault-tolerance from their disk subsystem. Which RAID level meets this requirement?

A. RAID-0
B. RAID-1
C. RAID-5
D. RAID-10

Answer: D

Practicetest 000-152 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-221 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-221 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-221 AIX 7 Administration our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-221 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
The administrator cannot ping the hostname of any system on the local network, including LPARs in the same managed system that have virtual Ethernet adapters configured on the same subnet and VLAN. What is the most likely cause of this problem?

A. The Ethernet cable from the system to the switch is disconnected or faulty.
B. The Shared Ethernet Adapter in the Virtual I/O Server in the managed system has a problem and is not passing communication between virtual adapters and the network.
C. The routing table has been flushed on the host and the default route is no longer configured.
D. DNS is disabled and the /etc/hosts file on the host does not contain the addresses for the hostnames that are being pinged.

Answer: D


QUESTION NO: 2
An LPAR has 32 CPUs, and is reporting hundreds of page-ins and page-outs per second. At what level of paging should the administrator become concerned?

A. Above the size of the paging space size in 4KB pages
B. Above 50 pages per second
C. Above 10 pages per CPU per second
D. Above 10 pages per GB of allocated memory per second
E. Above the number of paging space disks
Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 3
Which command will show the status of Geographically Mirrored Volume Groups?

A. gmvgstat
B. geovgstat
C. Isglvm
D. listgm

Answer: A

Practicetest 000-221 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-317 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-317 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-317 IBM WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.0, Core Administration our products of come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

Practicetest 000-317 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 1
A system administrator creates a profile and selects the option to allow WebSphere Application Server to create the default certificate. After the certificate is created, what attributes can the administrator customize, if needed?

A. location and lifespan of the certificate
B. location, type, and password of the keystore
C. Distinguished name (DN) and lifespan of the certificate
D. Distinguished name (DN) and password of the keystore

Answer: C


QUESTION NO: 2
A system administrator must configure IBM WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V8.0 to authenticate users with a Windows domain. The administrator should configure a registry that is:

A. a local operating system (OS).
B. a Virtual Member Manager (VMM).
C. a registry that implements WebSphere Common Configuration Model (WCCM).
D. an Active Directory (AD) domain controller.

Answer: A


QUESTION NO: 3
A system administrator needs to backup a WebSphere Application Server profile without
disrupting normal operations.
How can the administrator accomplish this?

A. Execute backupConfig.sh -nostop -profileName
B. Execute prnt.sh -nostop -backupProfile -profileName
C. Execute rnanageprofiles.sh -nostop -backupProfile -profileName
D. Use the administrative agent to configure a backup job without stopping the server.

Answer: A
Practicetest 000-317 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-106 ibm it-exams

Practicetest 000-106 ibm it-exams

IT Exam,IT Certification,braindump,original questions, question pool,document, braindump, test questions, test question, dumps, test answers, it-exams.com, preparation, pdf, certification questions, answers Certification, certification test, practice test, exam dumps, certification training, answers real questions

000-106 Power Systems with POWER7 Common Technical Sales Skills - v1 our products come with a 100% guarantee of success. We hold this claim because of the highly dedicated and expert team that we have and because of our past performance.

QUESTION NO: 1
A system is being planned with three production partitions, one each for an IBM i, AIX standard edition, and Power Linux applications. One fibre-channel attached TS3100 tape library will be shared between the partitions for backup.Which solution provides tape library sharing with minimum operator intervention?

A. Configure VIO Server Express Edition to control the tape library through one fibre channel card.Assign the library to the production partitions when needed.
B. Configure the IBM i partition to own the tape library.Use IBM i virtualization to host a virtual tape library connection to the AIX and Linux partition.Assign the library to the production partitions when needed.
C. Configure a fibre channel card for each partition, and a configure fibre switch.Connect the partitions and tape library to the switch.Zone the switch so all partitions can enable the tape when needed and disable the tape when finished.
D. Configure AIX to control the tape library through one fibre channel adapter.Use AIX
virtualization to host a virtual tape library connection to the IBM i and Linux partitions.Assign the library to the production partitions when needed.

Answer: C

Practicetest 000-106 ibm it-exams

QUESTION NO: 2
Which of the following items in a single enclosure Power 770 improves Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability?

A. Redundant system clocks
B. Redundant service processors
C. eDRAM chips have redundant L3 cache
D. Main memory DIMMs contain a redundant DRAM chip

Answer: D

QUESTION NO: 3
A customer would like to have the ability to permanently activate processor and memory resources as their workload increases. Which of the following supports the customer requirement?

A. Reserve Capacity on Demand
B. Utility Capacity on Demand
C. Capacity Upgrade on Demand
D. Uncapped Capacity on Demand

Answer: C

Practicetest 000-106 ibm it-exams

User Status

Du bist nicht angemeldet.

Aktuelle Beiträge

Microsoft 70-517 Praxisfragen
Wir liefern allen Kunden vor dem Einkauf der Prüfung...
nina008 - 28. Nov, 07:28
70-491 zertifizierungsprüfung
70-491 zertifizierungsprüfung gilt weltweit als eines...
nina008 - 28. Nov, 07:27
70-494 Schulungsunterlagen
Für Praxisprüfung haben wir zertifizierung-portal.de z wei...
nina008 - 28. Nov, 07:25
70-533 Prüfungsvorbereitung
Die detaillierten Analyse und Erläuterungen von den...
nina008 - 28. Nov, 07:23
MB4-873 aktuelles Zertifizierungsprogramm
MB4-873 aktuelles Zertifizierungsprogramm mit den neuen...
nina008 - 25. Nov, 10:02

Links

Suche

 

Status

Online seit 4669 Tagen
Zuletzt aktualisiert: 13. Jul, 03:46

Credits


70-491
70-494
70-517
70-533
77-603
MB4-873
MB4-874
Profil
Abmelden
Weblog abonnieren